Kula User Instruction Manual Issue 3 Rev 1

User Manual
Kula
&
Kula 12G-SDI
Production Switcher
Covering V3.1 Software Releases
www.s-a-m.com
Kula User Instruction Manual
1. Table of Contents
2. Warnings and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.0.1 Explanation of Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.0.2 Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.0.3 Lithium Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.0.4 Mainframe Mains Supply Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1 Kula Control Surface and Mainframe Power Cables Supplied for the USA . . . . 10
2.1.1 Kula Control Surface and Mainframe Power Cables supplied
for countries other than the USA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.1.2 External DC PSU for the Kula control Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2 Safety and EMC Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
2.3 On Receipt of the Kula System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3. Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.1 Kula Mainframe Introduction and Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.1 Kula System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2 Connecting the Touch Screen Monitor GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2.1 Current Compatible Touch Screen Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4. Kula Mainframe Rear Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

4.1 Kula Mainframe Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.1.1 Kula 12G-SDI Mainframe Rear Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5. Kula Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

5.0.1 Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
5.0.2 Menu Selection Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.1 Using the GUI Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.1.1 Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5.1.2 On Screen Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.1.3 Controlling Parameters using a Joystick or Rotary Controls . . . . . . . . . 25
5.1.4 Other Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
5.1.5 Time and Timecode Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
5.1.6 On-Screen QWERTY Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
6. Control Surface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

6.1 The Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.2 Source Selection Crosspoint Buttons and Colored Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6.2.1 Mnemonics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2.2 M/E & SME Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2.3 Key, A/B Bgnd, Util Bus DSK and Aux Selection Buttons
(also Macro selection on some control surfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
6.2.4 Macro Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.2.5 Transition Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.3 Key Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6.3.1 Rotary Controls with Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6.3.2 Number Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.3.3 Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7. Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7.1 Introduction to Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7.1.1 Using Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
7.1.2 How to create a new Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
8. How to Save Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

8.1 Saving Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.1.1 Saving a Config File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
8.1.2 Saving a Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
8.2 DMEM’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 2 © 2017 SAM

8.2.1 Creating a DMEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

8.2.2 Recalling a DMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
8.3 GMEM’s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8.3.1 Creating a GMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
8.3.2 Recalling a GMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
9. Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
9.1 Saving Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
9.1.1 Saving a Config File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
9.1.2 Sub Enables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
9.1.3 How to save a Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9.2 Engineering Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9.2.1 Input Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9.2.2 Input Frame Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
9.2.3 Output Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9.2.4 System Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
9.2.5 GPO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
9.2.6 IP Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
9.2.7 Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9.2.8 Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
9.2.9 FormatFusion3TM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
9.2.10 Input FormatFusion3 Inputs and Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9.2.11 Output FormatFusion3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
9.3 User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.3.1 M/E Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.3.2 Store Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
9.3.3 Aux Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
9.3.4 Resource Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.4 GPO Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
9.4.1 Crosspoint Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
9.4.2 Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
9.4.3 Global Modulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
9.4.4 User Config Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
9.4.5 Basic How to Use Modulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
9.4.6 Multiviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
9.4.7 Setup Multiviewer 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
9.4.8 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9.4.9 Title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
9.5 Panel Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.5.1 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.5.2 GUI Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
9.5.3 Panel Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9.5.4 Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.5.5 SnapShot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.5.6 Screen Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.5.7 Macro Button Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
9.6 Button Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.6.1 Panel Config - Edit Button Map Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
9.6.2 Edit a Button Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
9.6.3 New Button Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
9.6.4 Button Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
9.7 Preview Aux. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
9.7.1 Preview Aux Parameter Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
9.8 MAV Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9.9 Crosspoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
9.9.1 Key Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
9.9.2 Preset Trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.10 Aux Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
9.10.1 Setup an Aux Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
9.11 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

9.11.1 Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

9.11.2 How to Setup Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
9.12 Peripherals - Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
9.12.1 TSL UMD Output Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
9.12.2 TSL UMD In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
9.13 Peripherals - Router Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
9.13.1 Snell SW-P-08 - Xpt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
9.13.2 Utah RCP-3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
9.14 Peripherals - Engineering Router Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
9.14.1 Router Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
9.14.2 Router Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
9.14.3 External Router Control - Practical Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
9.15 Peripherals - User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
9.15.1 Tally Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
9.15.2 VTR Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.15.3 User Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
9.15.4 Editor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
9.15.5 RollCall Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.15.6 P-Bus Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
9.15.7 As Router Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
9.16 Shotoku Robotics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9.16.1 Using the Shotoku Robotic Peripheral Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9.16.2 Shotoku Camera Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
9.16.3 Camera - Shots Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
9.17 Peripherals - Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9.17.1 VDCP Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9.17.2 VDCP Ganged Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
9.17.3 AVSP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
9.17.4 Odetics Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
9.17.5 AMP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
9.17.6 Nexio Server - AMP Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
9.17.7 Nexio Record Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.17.8 Audio Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.17.9 VISCA Robotics Camera Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10. UHD Setup and Operation - UHD Quad and UHD 2SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10.1 Connecting UHD to the Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10.1.1 Inputs to the Switcher Mainframe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10.1.2 Outputs from the Switcher Mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10.2 UHD Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.2.1 UHD Engineering Config Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
10.2.2 UHD Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
10.2.3 UHD Output Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
10.2.4 UHD Stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
10.2.5 UHD Transitions and Wipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
11. 12G-SDI Setup and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

11.0.1 Set the System up in UHD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
11.0.2 12G SDI Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
11.0.3 12G-SDI Output Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
12. Operator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

12.1 Switcher Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.2 M/E3 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.3 Using the M/E Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
12.3.1 Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
12.3.2 Setting Basic Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
12.3.3 Basic Background Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
12.3.4 Basic Background Transition with a Wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
12.3.5 Basic Key Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .s244

12.3.6 Transition Control Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

12.4 Transition Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
12.4.1 Wipe Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
12.4.2 Advanced Wipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
12.4.3 Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12.4.4 Matte Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
12.4.5 NAM/FAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
12.5 MAV Trans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
12.5.1 Setting up a basic MAV Trans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
12.6 Util/Misc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
12.7 Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
12.7.1 Keying Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
12.7.2 Linear Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
12.7.3 Luma Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
12.7.4 Chroma Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
12.8 Accessing Keys on the Control Surface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
12.9 Placing a Key Layer to an Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
12.10 Keyer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
12.10.1 Key Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
12.10.2 Key Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
12.10.3 Selecting a Type of Key Using Key Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
12.10.4 Other Key Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
12.10.5 Linear and Luma Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
12.11 Box Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
12.12 Chroma Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12.12.1 Chroma Keying Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12.12.2 Achieving good results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12.12.3 Using the Chroma Key Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12.12.4 Chroma Keyer - Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
12.12.5 Chroma Keyer Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
12.12.6 Chroma Keyer Basic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
12.12.7 Chroma Key Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
12.13 Preset Masks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
12.13.1 Parameter Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
12.14 DVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
12.14.1 Position & Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
12.14.2 Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
12.14.3 Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
12.15 Dual Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
12.15.1 Dual Tile Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
12.15.2 Tile 1 Position & Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
12.15.3 Tile 1 Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
12.15.4 Tile 1 Border. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
12.15.5 Moving the two tiles so that both can be seen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
12.16 Color Correction - Key Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
12.17 SME Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
12.17.1 SME - Key 1 DVE Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
12.18 DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
12.18.1 DSK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
12.18.2 DSK Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
12.18.3 Linear and Luma DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
12.18.4 DSK DVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
12.18.5 Position & Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
12.18.6 Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
12.18.7 Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
12.19 Dual Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.19.1 Dual Tile Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12.19.2 Tile 1 Position & Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12.19.3 Tile 1 Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.19.4 Tile 1 Border. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

12.19.5 Moving the two tiles so that both can be seen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
13. Effects Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

13.1 Effects Dissolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
13.1.1 Saving an Effects Dissolve with a DMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
13.1.2 Applying a Dissolve Effect to an existing DMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
13.2 DMEM’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
13.2.1 Enables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
13.3 GMEM’s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
13.4 Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
13.4.1 Setting Up Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
13.5 Macro Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
13.5.1 Pausing a Macro Record Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
13.5.2 Appending more Macro Actions to a Macro Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 312
13.5.3 Macro Test and Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
13.5.4 Test Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
13.5.5 Pause Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
13.5.6 Wait Until Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
13.5.7 Ripple Action Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
13.5.8 Attacher and Parameter Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
13.5.9 Offline Macro Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
13.5.10 Creating a Macro “Offline” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
13.5.11 Edit an existing Macro using the Using Value and
Delegate Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
13.5.12 Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
13.5.13 Saving a Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
13.5.14 Assigning Macros to buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
13.5.15 GPI Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
13.5.16 Macro Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
13.6 Stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
13.7 ClipTraxTM - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
13.8 Importing Stills and Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
13.9 Store Load Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
13.9.1 Using Store Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
13.9.2 Loading a Still or Clip into a Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
13.10 Sub-Clips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
13.10.1 Creating Sub-Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
13.11 Store Play/Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
13.11.1 Transport Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
13.11.2 Using Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
13.12 Store - Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
13.13 Store - Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
13.14 Store - Grab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
13.14.1 Taking a Grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
13.14.2 Playback Transport Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
13.15 Store - Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
14. Initial Setup Menu’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

14.1 Log into the System and Set Up a User Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
14.1.1 Loading a Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
14.1.2 Switcher State - Overwrite and Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
14.1.3 Rolling Switcher States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
14.1.4 Configure Shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
14.1.5 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
14.1.6 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
14.1.7 Log Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

15. Maintenance & System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

15.1 Log Off - Mainframe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
15.1.1 Connect - Panel Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
15.2 Mainframe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
15.2.1 Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
15.2.2 Panel Login Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
15.2.3 Mainframe Color. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
15.2.4 SATA Drive Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
15.3 Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
15.4 Filing System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
15.5 Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
15.5.1 Using Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
15.5.2 How to create a new Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
15.5.3 Export a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
15.5.4 Delete a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
15.5.5 Project Locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
15.5.6 Default Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
15.6 Filing System - Config Filing System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
15.6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
15.6.2 Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
15.6.3 Delete an Engineering Config File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
15.6.4 Engineering Config File Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
15.6.5 Default Engineering Config File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
15.6.6 Load Engineering Config File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
15.7 Filing System - GMEM, DMEM, Stills, Snapshots, Button Maps,
Macros and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15.7.1 GMEM Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15.7.2 Delete GMEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
15.7.3 Lock GMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
15.7.4 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
15.7.5 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
15.7.6 Load GMEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
15.8 Import/Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
15.8.1 Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
15.8.2 Import / Export Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
16. Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

16.1 Kula Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
16.1.1 Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
16.2 Copyright and Disclaimer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

2. Warnings and Precautions

2.0.1 Explanation of Safety Symbols
This symbol refers the user to important information contained in the accompanying literature.
Refer to installation manual.
This symbol indicates that hazardous voltages are present inside. No user serviceable parts
inside. This unit should only be serviced by trained personnel.
2.0.2 Safety Warnings
C A U TIO N
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT REMOVE COVERS
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL ONLY
CAUTION: These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce risk
of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Operating
Instructions, unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel.
CAUTION: This equipment has more than one power supply cord. To reduce the risk of
electrical shock disconnect both the power supply cords before servicing.
Warning
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO
WATER OR MOISTURE.
! Always ensure that the unit is properly earthed and power connections correctly
made.
! This equipment must be supplied from a power system providing a PROTECTIVE
EARTH connection and having a neutral connection which can be reliably
identified.
! The power outlet supplying power to the unit should be close to the unit and
easily accessible.
! The IEC power inlets are the mains disconnection devices for this unit.

2.0.3 Lithium Batteries
Battery Warning
CAUTION
This equipment contains a lithium battery
There is a danger of explosion if this is replaced incorrectly
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer
instructions.
Batteries shall only be replaced by trained service technicians.
The Kula mainframe contains Lithium batteries to provide non-volatile memory.

Used batteries should be disposed of according to the manufacturers instruction.
Ensure that the same make and model of battery is used if replacement is required (a
manufacturer recommended equivalent may be used if the original type is not available).
The Kula mainframe can only be serviced by suitably qualified personnel and removal of the
battery should only be performed at a SAM service center.
2.0.4 Mainframe Mains Supply Voltage

Before connecting the equipment, observe the safety warnings section and ensure that the
local mains supply is within the rating stated on the rear of the equipment.
Mains Inputs to the Kula Mainframe

2.1 Kula Control Surface and Mainframe Power Cables Supplied for the USA
The Kula Control Surface and Mainframe power cords:
4 x RMW8 18 USA MAINS LEAD IEC TO 3BLADE PLUG 2.4M
GREEN lead connected to E (Protective Earth Conductor)
WHITE lead connected to N (Neutral Conductor)
BLACK lead connected to L (Live Conductor)
2.1.1 Kula Control Surface and Mainframe Power Cables supplied for countries
other than the USA
The Kula Control Surface and Mainframe power cords:
4 x RMW8 16 POWER CORD 10A 2M (IECSKT-IEC PLG
GREEN/YELLOW lead connected to E (Protective Earth Conductor)
BLUE lead connected to N (Neutral Conductor)
BROWN lead connected to L (Live Conductor)
2.1.2 External DC PSU for the Kula control Surface

Two external DC PSUs for the Kula Control Surface (RMY8 12V100W) 100-240V at 50 and
60Hz
To reduce the risk of electric shock, plug each power supply cord into separate branch circuits
employing separate service grounds.

2.2 Safety and EMC Standards
This equipment complies with the following standards:
EN60950-1: 2006
Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment.
UL1419 (3rd Edition)

Standard for Safety – Professional Video and Audio equipment (UL file number E193966)
EMC Standards
This unit conforms to the following standards:
EN55103-1:2009 (Environment E4)

Electromagnetic Compatibility, Product family standard for audio, video, audio-visual and
entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use. Part 1. Emission.
EN55103-2:2009 (Environment E2)

Electromagnetic Compatibility, Product family standard for audio, video, audio-visual and
entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use. Part 2. Immunity
FCC / CFR 47:Part 15 (Class A)

Federal Communications Commission Rules Part 15, Subpart B
EMC Performance of Cables and Connectors

SAM products are designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the appropriate European
EMC standards. In order to achieve this performance in real installations it is essential to use
cables and connectors with good EMC characteristics.
All signal connections (including remote control connections) shall be made with screened
cables terminated in connectors having a metal shell. The cable screen shall have a
large-area contact with the metal shell.
COAXIAL CABLES
Coaxial cables connections (particularly serial digital video connections) shall be made with
high-quality double-screened coaxial cables such as Belden 8281 or BBC type PSF1/2M and
Belden 1694A (for 3Gbps).
D-TYPE CONNECTORS
D-type connectors shall have metal shells making good RF contact with the cable screen.
Connectors having “dimples” which improve the contact between the plug and socket shells,
are recommended.

FCC Compliance
In order to comply with FCC/CFR47: Part 15 regulations, it is necessary to use the following
specification of cable assemblies for HDMI interconnections:
• For Mini HDMI to HDMI use a high-quality triple-screened cable assembly for opti-
mum with integrated ferrite suppression at both ends of the cable for optimum RF/EMI
integrity in compliance with HDMI specifications.
2.3 On Receipt of the Kula System

The equipment is supplied in dedicated packaging provided by the manufacturer and should
not be accepted if delivered in inferior or unauthorized materials.
• Carefully unpack the system components and check them against the packing list.
If there is anything incorrect notify your SAM Partner, or SAM, at once.
• Check that the equipment has not been damaged in transit. If any damage has
occurred notify your SAM Partner (or SAM directly) and the carrier immediately.
• Always retain the original packing materials if possible, they could prove useful should
it ever be necessary to transport or ship the system units.
• Always read the installation guide and the user instructions (separate manual) care-
fully, it will provide you with helpful hints and tips about care and maintenance and
help you get the most out of your Kula Production Switcher.
In the unlikely event of an equipment failure, contact your SAM Partner, or SAM, at once,
contact details are at the rear of this manual.

3. Product Overview
Thank you for purchasing your new KulaTM Production Switcher. This User Manual relates to
the operational side of the Kula system and will describe in detail how to use the Control
Surface and the touch screen or mouse driven Graphical User Interface (known as the GUI).
Please see the Kula Installation Manual for information about the connectivity of the
Mainframe and any Ancillary Panels.
Note: Diagrams are for illustration purposes only.
3M/E Kula (24 Crosspoint) 1x K1X, 1x K1X and 1x KPX Control Surface
2M/E Kula (24 Crosspoint) 1x K1X and 1x KPX Control Surface
2M/E Kula 1x KPP and 1x K1P Control Surface
1M/E Kula K5P (1M/E 19”) Control Surface
Kula Mainframe
Kula 12G-SDI Mainframe

The Kula Production Switcher is brand new addition to the SAM Family of Video Production
Switchers.
Kula offers a cost effective, flexible production switcher with a vast amount of features to meet
today’s budgets. The core design allows for a powerful HD/1080p/UHD production and mix in
these formats. The Kula switcher is a simple self contained Mainframe and intuitive control
surface that can be taken anywhere.
Kula has up to 3 full Mix Effects, each mix effect has A/B Backgrounds, 5 Keyers which include:
• 4 Full Effects Keyers with Lin/Luma
• 2 assignable DVE Engines (will give 4 independent boxes)
• Chroma Key assignable to all Keys (not DSKs)
• Transition Keyer with dedicated ClipStores for Key & Fill
• Mask Generator per Keyer
• Separate Wipe Generator
• Matte Generator
• 2 Util Buses per M/E.
The system also includes 2 Sub M/Es (SMEs) background with 2 Keyers, which can be used
on any output or use within any M/E for more keying power.
Example of a Kula System

Touch-screen monitor
Kula Control Surface
Kula Mainframe

3.1 Kula Mainframe Introduction and Functionality

The Kula mainframe is 2RU can its handle HD, SD, single link 1080p or UHD.
The mainframe has up to 36x Inputs, 12x fully assignable Outputs and 6x Bi-directional
Input/Outputs.
The Kula 12G-SDI mainframe has 40x Inputs (which includes 10x 12Gbps”silver” inputs), 12x
fully assignable Outputs (which includes 3x 12Gbps “silver” outputs) and 2x Bi-directional
Input/Outputs
• Large Internal ClipStore with 10 outputs holding 1 minute of uncompressed HD Video

and audio content that is totally routable.
• 4 x Floating Resizing Down Stream Keyers / Mixing Aux outputs without using M/E or
Sub M/E’s
• Fully flexible internal Multiviewer with 4 Heads and 12 Tiles.
External Control and connectivity consists of:
• 66 x GPI/O’s (on 3x 25 Way D-type connectors)
• 2 x RJ45 RS422 Ports
• 3 x Ethernet ports for Control Panel and TCP/IP protocols
• 2 x USB 3.0 Ports for User/Clip/System files Import, Export and Back up
Kula has 2 power supplies giving dual redundant capability.
All video input and output connections and timing signals are to the mainframe.
As well as the configuration set-up the actual operation set-up of the panel can be Stored. This
includes the selected transition, the Key sources, the still Store contents settings. All these
settings are accessed via menus on the GUI and will be explained later in this manual.
3.1.1 Kula System Components
1. Switcher Mainframe: (2RU rack height) in 2M/E (configurable to 3M/E) or 1 M/E

configurations
2. Control Surfaces: (depending on the system purchased) 3M/E Control Surface, 2M/E
Control Surface or 1M/E Control Surface and 1M/E (19”) Control Surface
3. External Power Supplies: 2 x PSU for the Control Surface
4. Cables: For each system purchased, there are 16x RJ45 Comms cables supplied:
• 4x 0.5 meters ~ 1 foot 7.68 inches
Note: Installation and User Manuals are supplied regardless of system components purchased.

3.2 Connecting the Touch Screen Monitor GUI

To connect a touch screen monitor to the Kula KPPP, KPX or K5P output port on the side near
the USB ports, the monitor port is used to connect to an external “computer” touch screen or
normal display monitor. The external monitor must have a 1920 x 1080 display resolution and
it is recommended that the monitor be larger than 21 inches.
KPP or KPX (Note: the K5P control surface is connected in exactly the same way).
Silk Screen from the

side of the Control surface MON (monitor HDMI) output port
MON (monitor HDMI) output port

USB port
When using a touch screen
HDMI Lead
USB Lead
Touch screen monitor - once the external monitor is connected to the Kula control surface, a
USB control lead (shown above) is connected, allowing the touch screen functions to be
used.
Non- touch screen monitor - once the external monitor is connected to the Kula control
surface, a USB mouse (shown above) is used to control the Kula menus on the monitor
screen.

3.2.1 Current Compatible Touch Screen Monitors

• iiyama T2250-MTS
• iiyama T2236-MSC B1 and B2
• iiyama T2252-MTS
• GeChic On-Lap 1502
• ELO_1002L_1502L
• ELO-2002L

4. Kula Mainframe Rear Connectors
4.1 Kula Mainframe Connections
A B C D E F G H
The table below outlines a 2M/E mainframe.
Table 1. Kula Mainframe Connectors
Connectors Description Connector Information
A Output BNCs 12x SDO BNC Outputs total (numbered BNC 1 to 12)
(6x SDO BNC Outputs on the 1M/E Mainframe)
Input/Output
B Bi-directional 6x SDI/SDO BNC (numbered13 to 18 if Outputs and 37
BNCs to 42 if Inputs)
C GPIO 3x 25 Way D-type GPIO connectors

(1 - 22, 23 - 44, 45 - 66)
D Reference 1x Ref In and 1x Ref out
E Network 3x 10/100/1000 base T
F USB 2x USB3 - for external memory device or hard drives
G Serial 2X RJ45, RS422 Ethernet ports
H Inputs 36x SDI BNC (numbered BNC 1 to 36)

(18x SDI BNC Inputs on the 1M/E Mainframe)
Note: Inputs and Outputs will vary, depending on the Kula system purchased.

4.1.1 Kula 12G-SDI Mainframe Rear Connectors
A B C D E F G H I C
Table 2. Kula 12G-SDI Mainframe Connectors
Connectors Description Connector Information
12x HD/SD/1080p (270Mbps / 1.485Gbps / 2.97Gbps)

A Output BNCs Outputs.
Serial digital interface As REC601/ SMPTE/292M /
SMPTE424M via BNC connectors.
Including 3 x 12G-SDI (SMPTE 2082) single link BNC
connectors (silver BNCs)
Input/Output
B Bi-Directional 2x SD/HD/1080p SDI/SDO BNCs
BNCs
40 x HD/SD/1080p (270Mbps / 1.485Gbps / 2.97Gbps)

Inputs.
C Input BNCs Serial digital interface As REC601/ SMPTE/292M /
SMPTE424M via BNC connectors.
Including 10 x 12G-SDI (SMPTE 2082) single link BNC
connectors (silver BNCs).
44 GPI Tally/GPO Outputs Assignable GPI / GPO Iso-

D GPIO lated contact closures via 2 x 25 way D Type.
Assignable as GPI or GPO.
4 x AES inputs and 3 x AES outputs with 1 x LTC input.

E AES/LTC (AES formal name is AES3-2003). LTC is Linear (or
Longitudinal) Timecode.
F Reference 1x Ref In and 1x Ref out
G Network 3x 10/100/1000 base T
H USB 2x USB3 - for external memory device or hard drives
I Serial 2X RJ45, 4 x RS422 serial ports

5. Kula Menu Operation

5.0.1 Menu Overview
Configuration and setup of a Kula system is driven using the intuitive menu system on the
touch screen or mouse pointer driven Graphical User Interface (GUI). The type of GUI
monitor used is a customer selected option, but the menu structures will be identical.
The menu structures are clear and allow the user to quickly move from menu to menu when
setting up or using a Kula production switcher.
Setup, Effects and System Configuration menu selection is done using the buttons down the
left side of the menu. Parameter controllers are on the right side of the menu and consist of
on-screen rotary controls and sliders (these can be attached to the physical rotary controls
and joystick on the control surface). Navigation, Copy & Paste, Undo/Redo, Macro Record
and Modulation Assign buttons are situated at the bottom.
All the menu functions, options and parameters are displayed in the center area of the menu.
1 2
3
1. Menu Selection Buttons
2. Selected menu functions and options
3. On-screen Rotary and Slider Controls and Integer Buttons
4. Menu Navigation and Control

5.0.2 Menu Selection Buttons

The information below highlights the function of each button.
Switcher Setup Switcher Setup:

These buttons allow the user to enter the main user setup menus for the
M/Es, SMEs and DSKs.
For the M/Es and SMEs, the menus allow the user to access the Transition,
Keyer, MAV Trans and Util bus setup and control menus.
DSK menu is for DSK setup and control
Effects Memories Effects Memories:

The DMEM and GMEM menus allow the user to quickly select and load
effects memory files.
The Macro button enters the main macro setup menu.
The Store button enters the main Store setup menu.
System Configuration System Configuration:

As the name suggests, these are the main system configuration menus. Here
the user is able to setup Crosspoints, M/E Outputs, Aux setup, Button Maps,
Control Surface and GUI Preferences, GPOs, Store Setup etc.
The Filing System button enters a menu where the filing system information
for all Projects, GMEMs, DMEMs, Config files, Snapshots etc. are kept. It
contains the Import/Export of files menu where Projects, Stills, Clips and
individual files are imported and exported, the menu also contains the
Backup, ReStore and Media Management menus.
The Shortcuts menus displays an on-screen number pad for saving and
loading GMEMs and DMEMs and an on-screen Transition Control menu.

Normal A press and release of this button normalizes all the adjustable values in the current selected
menu.
Mod Assign Assigns a modulation effect to a chosen parameter.
Macro Record Will record any button press sequences in “Real Time” to the macro function, which can then
be setup within the Macro menus.
Undo & Redo Incrementally undo or redo.
Copy Clone The Copy Clone and Paste Clone buttons are used to copy button functions from either the
Paste Clone Kula menus or from the control surface and allows the user to setup a system to their own
operational preference.
Copy & Paste The Copy & Paste function enables the user to quickly and simply transfer values from one
parameter to another. This function can be used to record and transfer one or two
co-ordinates or even the detail of a whole M/E.
Menu Navigation The menu navigation buttons will step through menus in the direction selected. Back will go
Buttons back to a previously visited menu or menus. Up will either come out of a menu structure to the
“Connected” menu or go to the top menu in a menu structure.

5.1 Using the GUI Menus
1. Title Bar
2. On-screen Rotary and Slider Controls and Integer Buttons
3. Attachers with Parameters
5.1.1 Title Bar

All menus have a title bar situated at the top of the menu, the title bar Shows the full title of the
current menu. A second line in the title bar will indicate the mainframe the system is
connected to, or that it is controlling a particular M/E, SME, Background or Key.
Note: Touching the Title Bar at the top of the page will allow the user to return to the menu page's
original state, as would be the case if leaving the menu and then re-entered it. Adjustments
to attacher parameters remain unchanged; it just acts as a shortcut to the original
combination of attacher boxes.
Note: Touching and holding the title bar will display a dialog box asking if the user wishes to save
the menu as the default logging in menu.

5.1.2 On Screen Control

On the right hand side of the menu are the rotary and slider controls, these are linked to
parameters within a selected attacher. The parameters can be adjusted using the on-screen
rotary/slider controls, the physical rotary controls on the control surface, or the joystick on the
control surface. If the parameter control is a Red triangle, this indicates that the adjustment
can be made using the Joystick.
When active the parameter indicators will turn RED as shown below.
Examples of Attachers
Inactive Controls Active Controls

are Gray are Red
Note: A Triangle Shows that
the parameter can be
controlled with a Joystick
Name Attacher
Touch the Red oblong control twice
and an on-screen keyboard will appear
allowing the user to give the function a name

5.1.3 Controlling Parameters using a Joystick or Rotary Controls

The diagram below displays an example of an attacher with parameters that can be controlled
using the joystick. The controls changes from round to a triangle, showing that a joystick can
be used.
Touch the attacher

and the controls turn
into triangles
The parameter
controls also turn
into triangles
The rotary controls on the Kula controls surface can also be used to control parameters, not
only rotary parameters but scrolling list parameters and slider controlled parameters.
Toggle buttons
To attach the physical rotary controls to parameters in a menu, press the 2 toggle buttons next
to the rotary controls at the same time, notice that the parameter control information is
displayed in the mnemonic displays next to the rotary controls.
As the controls are turned the parameters will also adjust in the menu.

5.1.4 Other Menu Functions
Menu Link Button
Menu Link buttons allow the user to enter a sub-menu, mainly shown at the bottom of menu’s.
Action Button
When pressed the Action buttons apply the selected action to a menu. The buttons go Green
when active.
Pop-up List
Selector
Snap & Normal

Buttons
Popup - Touching this button will display an “options dialog box”. This allows the user quick
access to all options available in the selected parameter, without having to use the rotary
control to scroll through all the options.
Snap & Normal - The Snap button when pressed will jump a parameter to an incremental
value.
The Normal button has two states, when it is illuminated Green this indicates that the
currently selected parameter is in its default state. When the rotary control is turned, the
button will turn Orange, denoting that the currently selected parameter’s value has been
changed, Press the button and the parameter will revert back to its original default state, the
button will once again turn Green.

5.1.5 Time and Timecode Adjustments
It is worth mentioning that some menus described in this manual will have the option of
adjusting the duration of Hours, Minutes, Seconds and Hundredths, as shown in the
diagram the adjustment can be made using either the parameter controls or using the
numeric keypad (by touching the popup button).
This Example: - Transition Time: 01:07
This Shows the duration as, 01(second):7 (frames)
5.1.6 On-Screen QWERTY Keyboard
Some menus have name attachers, touching the red oblong twice will display an on-screen
QWERTY keyboard that can be used to enter text.
Enter the chosen name (text entry is displayed at the top of the keyboard dialog box), then
press “Enter”. To return to the original menu screen if no changes are made to a parameter,
press the “Cancel” button on the keyboard.
Text can also be typed into name attachers using a USB keyboard connected to the
mainframe.

6. Control Surface Overview
Note: This section of the manual is an overview of the control surface, further details related to
button interaction and functionality will be explained with the more advanced functions of
Kula.
Control Surface button layouts will vary depending on the type of control surface
purchased.
6.1 The Control Surface

Kula Control Surfaces all have a similar look and feel throughout the range, the layout is best
explained by breaking down the control surface into sections, once one Mix Effect (M/E) bank
has been explained the information can be applied to other control surfaces.
Kula 2M/E Control Surface 4

6
Key/A/B Bgnd 8
5 Transition
2 /Util/DSK/Aux
1 (Macro on Macro On/Off Control 7 Rotary Controls
Mnemonics with Mnemonics
3 some (some models) Key 9
Source Selection Modes) Control Joystick
Crosspoint Buttons M/E & SME
(A/B Bus and Key Bus etc.) selection
Number 10
Pad
M/E Bank
The example diagram above is of the larger 2M/E Control Surface, this example is shown
because it has all the possible combinations of button layouts available on a current control
surface.
Moving around the control surface in the diagram above, each numbered item will be
explained in this section of the manual.

6.2 Source Selection Crosspoint Buttons and Colored Mnemonics

1
Kula Control Surfaces have the option of 1, 2 or 3 banks of M/E source selection buttons and
each M/E has the same number of crosspoint selection buttons (16 or 24 depending on model
purchased). With the exception of some features such as Macro selection, Joystick and
Number pad each M/E will work in the same way, an example is shown below.
Example of M/E Source Selection Buttons
There are three rows of source selection buttons, the lower two being for the M/E background
source selection A/B (PGM/PVW on output M/E) and the upper one for the Key, A/B Bgnd,
Util Bus, DSK and Aux selections.
The source selection buttons for each function (A/B, C/D Background, Key/Util) form a
crosspoint bus which is fundamentally a switching matrix with the incoming signals forming
the vertical parts of the matrix and the bus outputs the horizontal parts.
A Bus button (crosspoint button) when pressed creates a matrix crosspoint, once setup
correctly, the circuit tells the mainframe to route the source to an output.
Kula allows any physical input source, any Store or Matte to be mapped to any crosspoint
button for a specific M/E, i.e. one M/E may be mapped differently to the other. Using a
combination of crosspoint and button map, mapping specific signal sources that can be
shared across M/E’s or restricted to one particular M/E.

6.2.1 Mnemonics
2
There is a row of Mnemonics between the key bus and program/preset (A/B)bus buttons. This
will display information relevant to the source allocated to each button. The mnemonics
provide a display of 64 pixels wide by 48 pixels high for each column of buttons.
Mnemonics on Kula can also be set to have a basic image instead of text, this is done in the
Crosspoint menu and will be explained in the Crosspoint section of this manual.
6.2.2 M/E & SME Selection

Kula M/E selection delegate button, allows the user to select which M/E or SME they wish to
3 use on that M/E bank. This is done by using the toggle buttons to step through the M/E or
SME options on the OLED button, then press the OLED button to select the required option.
When a Kula system has a 2M/E control surface, any M/E or SME can be selected to work on
any M/E bank.
Toggle Up/Down buttons
M/E or SME selection
6.2.3 Key, A/B Bgnd, Util Bus DSK and Aux Selection Buttons
(also Macro selection on some control surfaces)
Like the M/E selection buttons above, use the toggle buttons to step through the bus options
and then press the OLED button to select the option.
Here the user has the option to select Keys 1 - 4, Bgnd A/B, Util 1/2, DSK 1 - 4 and Aux
Buses 1 to 64.

6.2.4 Macro Selection

On the KPP control surface, a Macro button will change the Key Delegate OLED button into a
5 Macro bus selection button. Pressing the macro toggle button will cause the OLED button to
display “Macro Page 1”, press the toggle button again allows the user to step through macro
pages 1 to 3.
Note: How macros are setup and attached to buttons is explained in the macro chapter of this
manual.
Macro Toggle Button
The mnemonic display next to the macro toggle button will display all the “loaded” macros for
each macro page.
The K1P control surface has a cluster of 8 fixed macro buttons (as shown below), the
mnemonics display the macro that is attached to the button.

6.2.5 Transition Control

6
Transition control area with Key, Background, Clip (MAV Trans) Wipe, Mix and Key 1 to 4
transition selection. The transition controls are used to control Background, Key and Clip
(MAV Trans) transitions.
ON/OFF (Key 1 to Key 4)

The four On/Off buttons are used to cut a Key Layer on or off, the affected Key Layers are 1 to
4 from left to right. The lamps within the buttons have three states; Off, White or Red, these
indicate the following situations:
• Off - The Key Layer is off.
• White - The Key Layer is on but not contributing to the program or M/E output.
• Red - The Key Layer is on and contributing to the program or M/E output.
By pressing one of these buttons the following will happen:

Press once and the Key Layer is on but will only contribute to the programme or M/E output if
set to contribute.
Press once again and the Key Layer is turned off.
If part way through a transition, pressing one of buttons removes the layer from the transition
process.
BGND, KEY 1 to 4 Transitions

Sets the BGND to be On/Off, when selecting Key Layers 1 - 4 to be on-screen. it also selects
the Key Layer(s) for the next transition. Any number may be active at any one time. Pressing
any one of these buttons will clear all others. Holding one button down and then pressing any
others will make all of those selected active.
Any or all of these buttons can be selected as required. The transition for the selected layer(s)
is started by pressing the [AUTO] button. This facility allows one or more of the Key Layers to
be transitioned, using a different transition for each layer, at the same time as the background
transition.

Transition Buttons
CLIP
Allows the key transition to be associated with a selected clip from an internal source. The clip
position is determined by the Transition Time.
MIX
Selects Mix as the main transition. When using this function, the type of mix used in a
transition is setup in the Transition menu
WIPE
Selects Wipe as the main transition.
CUT
An immediate “Cut” between the Background or Key sources causing bus swap.
PVW TRANS
Allows the next transition to be previewed on the preview monitor without affecting the
program output.
AUTO
Starts an automatic pre-timed transition, using whatever transition types and times have been
selected for the layers included in the transition. The transition time for each layer can be
different as can any time offsets.
T-Bar
Performs a manual transition using whatever transition types have been selected.

6.3 Key Control

The Key Control buttons are used to set parameters for the Key Layers on an M/E. The
function of each button is described below.
Key Control Function Buttons:
LED Bars
These bar displays indicate the priority levels of the Key channels, where the top bar is
highest priority downstream.
FULL
The fill is a full layer over the background hiding it completely.
LIN
Linear Key (a pre-cut key)
LUMA
Luminance Key (no pre-keying has been applied to the fill)
CHROMA
Selects the Chroma Keyer menu on the GUI
INV
Inverts the keying signal
MATTE FILL
Sets Matte for the selected Key Layer as that layers fill
COUPLED KEY
Sets the Key source as that selected on the bus crosspoint
SPLIT KEY
Allows the fill and cut signals to be separated. The fill signal is selected as normal. To split the
cut signal, press and hold this button and select the cut signal on the Key crosspoint bus. With
this button pressed the bus displays the cut source and with it released the fill source is
displayed.

SELF KEY
Uses its self to cut and fill.
CC (color correction)
Selects the Bus color effects facility
2D
Selects the re-size options X/Y and zoom position of the selected Key.
CROP
Selects the Key Mask facility
KEY1 to 4
Selects the Key Layer that will be affected by the Key Control buttons
T-Bar
Performs a manual transition using whatever transition types have been selected.
6.3.1 Rotary Controls with Mnemonics

The rotary controls (or sometimes called “Shaft Encoders”) have a dual purpose, they can
either be used to adjust “Local” parameters in the Key Control area of the control surface such
as “Matte Fill” or “Color Correction”.
Toggle Buttons
If the two toggle buttons are pressed together, then the rotary controls will latched to the
selected parameter controls on the GUI. In the picture above, the mnemonics show that the
rotary controls will adjust a Key Layer X Pos, Y Pos and Zoom.
Pressing just the top toggle button will also step through and select the parameters in the
current menus on the touch screen GUI.

6.3.2 Number Pad

6
The number pad on the Kula control surface (shown below), is used for the direct loading and
saving of DMEM's and GMEM's. The mnemonic display next to the M/E and SME buttons
defaults to showing the last DMEM/GMEM loaded.
Note: Using the number pad to load DMEMs and GMEMs is explained in the “How to Save Files”
chapter in this manual.
6.3.3 Joystick
Any parameter set that has an X-Y or zoom adjustment can be attached to the joystick as well
as the rotary parameter controls.
Where a parameter set is attached to a rotary control or the joystick, the parameter set
symbol will be a red circle and the parameter will show a red triangle.
MEM button - when the MEM button is Off (unlit) the device will be connected to the current
parameters, indicated by red triangles, when ON the device will revert to the saved
parameters). When in SNAP mode these buttons will perform as before:
Single Press = SNAP
Double Press = Normalize
Press and Hold = attach to number pad

When a parameter set is attached to the joystick it may be independently locked to either one
of the parameters by using the [MEM] button. When either one is so locked to a parameter,
any further attachment is only to the non locked device and rotary control/button pair.
To lock a parameter set to the Joystick, press and hold the [MEM] button. When locked a
short press on the [MEM] button will toggle control between the locked memory set and that
of the current menu.

7. Projects
7.1 Introduction to Projects

Kula is a Projects driven system where the user is able to create 98 individual Projects to
Store and save their work and the user-defined setup of the system. It is worth noting that
even though there are 100 Projects available, that Project 0 and Project 99 are not used
because they are reserved as a Default Project (0) and a SnapShot Project (99).
Projects Store all the saved files from the Engineering, User and Panel Configs, Stores,
Macros and most importantly the saved GMEM and DMEM files. Basically, everything is
saved into Projects.
7.1.1 Using Projects

As stated earlier Kula is a Project based system where all DMEM’s, GMEM’s, Panel Configs,
Stills, Macros and other files are Stored into individual user-defined Projects. To get to the
Projects menu touch the {Filing System} button on the GUI and the first menu that will
appear will be the Projects menu.
As you can see from the diagram above, Projects are in number order in the table, it also
allows the user to see what number can be chosen for a new Project i.e. any number that is
not in the table.
The columns depict the user-defined name given to the Project and the number of DMEM’s,
GMEM’s, Panel Configs, Stills, Macros and other files saved within that Project.

7.1.2 How to create a new Project

To create a new Project, use the New Project parameter to select an unused Project number
and then press the {New Project...} button. Notice that a new Project has been added to the
table.
New Project button New Project Parameter
A name can be given to the new Project by touching the Red name attacher button twice, and
then entering the name using the on-screen keyboard.
The new Project can now be used.
Note: Projects will be described in detail in the Filing System chapter of this manual.

8. How to Save Files
8.1 Saving Files

As mentioned in the Projects chapter, when saving files, everything is saved into a Project.
Once a Project has been created, the user is able to save files in several different ways. The
user can save individual “Config” files while working in the User, Panel or Engineering Config
menus, or they can save DMEMs and GMEMs.
DMEM’s and GMEM’s Store user-defined setup states of an individual M/E or the overall
setup of a Kula Control Surface and form a comprehensive “Advanced Effects Memory
Recall Systems”. This means that the user has the flexibility to save or recall setup’s
instantly. They are easy to use, and one of the most important features of a Kula system.
8.1.1 Saving a Config File

The User, Panel and Engineering Config files are used to save up to 1000 different config
setup states per Project. They are very important and while setting up a system, should be
saved regularly so that no config state is lost. When the config setups are saved, they are
listed as files in a table in the menu, so that the user can easily see the time/date that a config
was saved, allowing the file to be instantly loaded.
Note: This example will show how to save a User Config file. Saving an Engineering Config or
Panel Config file is done in exactly the same way.
Note: Before saving a file, look at the “Current Project” parameter and make sure that the Project
being displayed is the correct one to save to.
The “Sub Enables” list of buttons, to the right of the config files table, allows the user to select
or de-select functions that will be saved with a file. If the tab next to the enables button is
green, this means that the enabled function is included in the file. If the tab is gray, the
function is not included. If the enabled function is selected (green) when the config is saved,
the function will be included in the saved config.

8.1.2 Saving a Config

Saving a file is very easy. In the menu, press the {Save As} button and a new config file table
will be displayed,
In the table select a slot where the file will be saved using the “Destination” parameter, or just
touch the slot in the table. There are 1000 slots to choose from. When selected the row will be
highlighted, then double touch the red oblong in the “Name” attacher and an on-screen
keyboard will be displayed.
Type out a name for the config file and press {Enter}.
Finally, press the {Save} button and the new config file is saved into the table.
Each file can be overwritten, locked so that they cannot be saved to, or deleted from the table.
Note: Remember: Any changes that need to be kept..... Save the Config File

8.2 DMEM’s
What is a DMEM
A DMEM or Dynamic Memory, saves set-up information related to a single M/E, which may
contain information such as:
• Bus set-up (Crosspoints, Keyers, Wipes, Transitions)
• Color Effects
• Key Layer Priorities
• Masks, Crops, Borders
DMEM’s are Stored within a user-defined Project, the user can save up to 1000 DMEM’s
within a single Project.
With the defined Project selected, the Filing System menu allows the user to enter the
DMEM filing system where the user is able to Load or Delete selected DMEM’s, Export
DMEM’s to external memory devices or view detailed contents within the DMEM.

8.2.1 Creating a DMEM

All DMEM’s are saved into and recalled from Projects, to create a DMEM, follow the steps
below.
Step 3
Select an M/E or Step 2
SME Enter DMEM
number e.g.
78
Step 1
Enter a Project
number e.g. Step 4
12. (dot) Press
SAVE
Step 1 - Enter in the Project Number e.g. 12 followed by a [.] (dot), the dot signifies that a
DMEM number will be entered next.
The top mnemonic display will show “PROJ #12”
Step 2 - Enter the DMEM memory position number e.g. 78.

The top mnemonic display will show “PROJ #12”, the next mnemonic display down will show
“GMEM #78” (GMEM will be changed to DMEM in the next step).
Note: When operating in the Current Project that you will be saving the DMEMs into, you can skip
entering “Project Number [.] Effect Number” and instead just enter the Effect Number and
SAVE.
Step 3 - Select which M/E you want to save the setup state from, e.g. pressing ME1 will save
data from M/E1 (the selected button will turn white).
By selecting the M/E, the mnemonic display changes to show “DMEM #78”. To deselect an
M/E, press that M/E again.
Note: Pressing [CANCEL] at any point before saving will cancel the entire operation
Step 4 - Finally, press the [SAVE] button.
If the DMEM already exists, the bottom mnemonic display will show “File Exists Overwrite?”
Press [SAVE] again to save the DMEM.

8.2.2 Recalling a DMEM

To recall a DMEM follow the steps below.
Step 3
Select an M/E or
SME
Step 2
Enter DMEM
number e.g.
45
Step 1
Enter Project
number e.g.
12
Step 4
Press
LOAD
Step 1 - Enter the Project number (e.g. 12) followed by a dot [.]
The top mnemonic display will show “PROJ #12” the next mnemonic display down will show
the last GMEM saved “GMEM #78”
Step 2 - Enter the DMEM memory number (e.g. 45).

The mnemonic display will show “GMEM #45” (GMEM will be changed to DMEM in the step
3).
Note: When operating in the Current Project that you will be recalling the DMEMs from, you can
skip entering “Project Number [.] Effect Number” and instead just enter the Effect Number
and [LOAD]
Step 3 - Select the M/E or SME with the DMEM you want to load. The mnemonic display
changes to show “DMEM #45”.
Step 3 - Press [LOAD]

8.3 GMEM’s
What is a GMEM
A GMEM or Global Memory will save set-up information relating to multiple M/E’s. A GMEM
saves all the same information as DMEM’s with the added ability to save Stores and
Configurations:
• Color Effects
• Stores
• User Config
A GMEM can save all of the above as a complete snapshot of the entire system setup.
GMEM’s are saved within a user-defined Project, which can be viewed in the Filing System
menu allowing the user to enter the GMEM filing system where the user is able to Load or
Delete selected GMEM’s, Export GMEM’s to external memory devices or view detailed
contents within the GMEM.

8.3.1 Creating a GMEM

Creating a GMEM is very similar to creating a DMEM.
Step 3
Select M/E’s Step 2
Stores and Enter GMEM
Enables number e.g.
78
Press the [MENU]

button for more
options
Step 4
Step 1 Press
Enter Project SAVE
number e.g.
12. (dot)
Step 1. Enter a (existing) Project number followed by a [.] “dot”

Step 2. Enter a number that is used to recall a GMEM.

“GMEM #78”
Note: When operating in the Current Project that you will be saving the GMEMs into, then you
can skip entering “Project Number [.] Effect Number” and instead just enter the Effect
Number and SAVE.
Step 3. At this point the user now has the choice to select multiple M/E’s, Stores,
configurations and Enables that will be saved within the GMEM.
To individually select M/E’s press the ME number required e.g. ME1, ME2, SME1 and SME2,
the selected buttons will go white.

To add other features press [MENU] button on the number pad and the DMEM/GMEM
enables menu will appear, this is where the User Config files are saved within the GMEM,
including M/E’s and Stores.
The menu above is the first menu shown when you press the [MENU] button.
Select the function options required and when the GMEM is saved they will be included within
the GMEM.
Step 4. Press [SAVE]. The GMEM can be saved using the number pad or using the menu
above.
The option to save as a Hard or Soft GMEM will now be displayed in the bottom two
mnemonic displays, press button number [1] so save as a Soft GMEM and button [2] to save
as a Hard GMEM.,
Hard GMEM - will save all the Stores and M/E data in a single file, or a “Complete Snapshot”.
Soft GMEM - will save “pointers” to the DMEM files and Stores.
Hard GMEM Definition - a Hard GMEM saves whatever is created on the panel and included
in the memory as a set state.
Soft GMEM Definition - a Soft GMEM will save whatever is currently loaded and shown on
the number pad screen, so for example; the user can setup the panel in a specific
configuration and then save as a soft GMEM, but the system will not remember what was
created on the control surface, instead the system will take the information that was last
physically loaded and shown on the number pad screen, then save those settings. The user
can still update a DMEM and the Soft GMEM will remember the latest version of that DMEM
as long as that DMEM was loaded on the number screen when you saved the Soft GMEM.
To save the GMEM press [SAVE].
If the file already exists you will be prompted to overwrite it - if [SAVE] is pressed a second
time, the existing file will be overwritten.
The save process may take a few seconds depending on the amount of information that is
being Stored within the GMEM.

8.3.2 Recalling a GMEM
Step 2
Enter GMEM
number e.g.
78
Step 1
Enter Project
number e.g.
12. (dot)
Step 3
Press GMEM
LOAD
Again recalling a GMEM is very simple and similar to recalling a DMEM.
.
Step 1 - Enter the Project number, followed by a dot [ ]
Step 2 - Enter the GMEM memory number

“GMEM #78”
Note: When operating in the Current Project that you will be recalling the GMEMs from, then you
can skip entering “Project Number [.] Effect Number” and instead just enter the Effect
Number and LOAD
Step 3 - Finally press [LOAD].
The GMEM may take a few seconds to load depending on the amount of information that was
Stored within the GMEM.

9. Configuration
9.1 Saving Files

Before describing the Configuration menus, it is a good idea to explain how to save a config
file. All config files are saved into a Project.
9.1.1 Saving a Config File

The Engineering, User and Panel Config files are used to save up to 1000 different config
setup states into Projects. They are very important and while setting up a system, should be
saved regularly so that no configuration state is lost. When the config setups are saved, they
are listed as files in a table (as shown in the menu below), so that the user can easily see the
time/date that a config was saved, allowing the file to be instantly loaded.
Note: This example will show how to save a User Config file. Saving an Engineering Config or
Panel Config file is done in exactly the same way.
Note: Before saving a file, look at the “Current Project” parameter and make sure that the Project
being displayed is the correct one to save to.
9.1.2 Sub Enables

The “Sub Enables” list of buttons, to the right of the config files table, allows the user to select
or de-select functions that can be saved with a file.
If the tab next to the enables button is green, this means that the function was included when
the file was originally saved. If the tab is gray, the function is not included when the file was
originally saved. If an enabled function is selected (green), when the config is saved, the
function will be included in the saved config (shown below).
Enables and Sub Enables buttons are found in the in the Engineering, User and Panel Config
menus as well as the Filing System menus.

Override Enables - will override any enables that have been de-selected and turn the enable
On.
Merge Enables - this merges enables currently set in the switcher with the enables saved in
the file being loaded (a "logical OR" of the enables).
9.1.3 How to save a Config

In the menu, press the {Save As} button and a new config file table will be displayed. In the
table, select a slot where the file will be saved using the “Destination” parameter, or just touch
the slot in the table. There are 1000 slots to choose from. When selected the row will be
highlighted, then double touch the red oblong in the “Name” attacher and an on-screen
keyboard will be displayed.
Type out a name for the config file and press {Enter}.
Finally, press the {Save} button and the new config file is saved into the table.
Each file can be overwritten, locked so that they cannot be saved to, or deleted from the table.
Note: Remember: Any changes that need to be kept..... Save the Config File

9.2 Engineering Configuration

To get to the Engineering Config menus, press the {Up} button until the “Connected to”
menu is reached. In this menu, touch the {Defaults} menu link button, then in the Defaults
menu, touch the {Engineering Config...} menu link button (shown below).
9.2.1 Input Setup

The Input Setup menu has several main configuration functions integrated into one to allow
the user to quickly configure an input to the mainframe. The user can give a name to the input
source and apply a video standard.
At the top of the menu is a single row table showing the currently selected Input and BNC
number, the description of the input (if it has been given one) and the crosspoint that the input
source is assigned to.
The BNC Input parameter is used to select an input. The user can also touch the “Pop-up
Selector” which will show all the available inputs.
The Router Overwrite parameter when set to {Yes} will allow an externally connected router
to rename a source.

The Use Default Std parameter will force the input source to use the default mainframe video
standard which is set in the Eng Config - System Standard menu. The Default Standard can
be changed using the New Standard parameter. Use the Up/Down scroll buttons to select the
required standard, then touch the {Apply} button.
If a new default standard is selected press the {Apply Standard} button for the new video
standard to be set.
The Name attacher allows the user to give the selected input a name and a description; using
the on-screen keyboard.
The attacher also displays if Router Overwrite has been selected.
The {Copy & Next} button is a quick shortcut function forcing the switcher to take the name
from the current Source, and then jumps on to the next Source in the list - this makes naming
all of the sources much easier and quicker.
This menu displays the video standard for the selected BNC. The video standard for the
incoming source can be set to the default mainframe video standard, changed to a new
standard or using the {Auto Standard} button which will allow the system to “auto detect” the
incoming source video standard and will keep the original video standard of the incoming
source
New Standard parameter, use the Up/Down scroll buttons to select the required standard,
then touch the {Apply} button.
The V Offset F1/F2 parameters are used to adjust to the point where active video reaches the

The Timing Parameter indicates the Offset in Micro seconds (or Milli Seconds) between the
Reference input and the selected source. To Clean switch or avoid a Line offset (e.g. a
vertical shift) the Timing has to be within +/- half a line of the current standard. e.g. for
1920x1080i59.94 +/-14uS).
Note: All Sources have to be within this window. Any sources outside this window can be
corrected by using FormatFusion.
To Adjust this timing window go to the Eng Config/System Standard menu and adjust the
Genlock phase. NB adjustment of the Gen Lock Phase will also adjust the Video Outputs to
have a Phase offset from the incoming reference. The Output Offset is +2 Lines from the
Reference + Genlock Phase.
The CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) field shows the CRC for the current Frame. e.g. In
general this will be a changing number for a moving picture and a static number for a still.
The {Copy & Next} button is a quick shortcut function forcing the switcher to take the name
from the incoming Source, and then jumps on to the next Source in the list - this makes
naming all of the incoming sources much easier and quicker.

9.2.2 Input Frame Synchronization

Sometimes sources will arrive at the switcher, which are not synchronized. Using frame
synchronizers in Kula we can ensure all sources cut cleanly.
With Kula we also have a 10µs timing window, so if the source is within this, a frame
synchronizer is not required.
9.2.2.1 Frame Synchronization using FormatFusion3
FormatFusion3 on Kula allows frame synchronization and also format conversion on all
inputs. We have up to 4 FormatFusion3 channels in the 1M/E Kula and up to 8
FormatFusion3 channels in the 2M/E Kula. Each of these FormatFusion3 channels can be
assigned to any inputs, any outputs and any Buses.
This gives us the ability to frame synchronize on every input without loosing any of the DVE
power from the M/Es, in HD and 3G.
9.2.2.2 If more than 4 or 8 sources are need to be Synchronized
Broadcast facilities normally only need to synchronize cameras or outside sources that are
not locked or have been temporarily added into an existing production work flow.
Typically as 1 M/E and 2 M/E productions don't require a huge amount of cameras or outside
sources, so, 8 synchronizers is more than enough.
With Kula software version 3.1r1 and greater, FormatFusion3 can now be assigned to any of
the internal Buses, including M/E Buses. This means all sources selected on the M/E will be
synchronized. This gives the ability to synchronize all incoming sources.
In the Engineering Config - Format Fusion menu, set the “Bus Mode” parameter to “On”.
The “Bus” parameter controls will turn on allowing the user to touch the “Popup” button to
open the popup menu. The user can now select between M/E Key, M/E Bgnd and M/E Util
Buses for the selected M/E. This can be done on a channel by channel basis.
As mentioned earlier, if the user selects for example “ME 1 Bgnd A” all sources selected on
that Bus will now be synchronized.
Note: See the FormatFusion3 section at the end of the Engineering Config section of this
manual.

The example below shows how the FormatFusion3 can be applied in a 1M/E system.
With this configuration we are able to produce an output like this:

Now, look at a typical more complex example that may be used with 2 M/Es.

The user can now create a 5 way box on M/E 1 (all possible with non sync sources) with a
store or any other background, plus graphics using Key 4 for the location of each of the
boxes.
This can then be taken as a source on M/E 2, with lower third GFX, bugs and logos added.
Plus animated MAV Trans can still be done on both M/Es using the internal clip store.
9.2.2.3 Summary
Synchronizers are not normally required for all sources, as in house standard cameras,
servers, GFX are normally locked to in house reference. External or non standard equipment
normally requires synchronization.
This document shows the flexible nature of Kula and FormatFusion3 to be able to
synchronize all inputs and still create complex effects with multiple DVEs, both in HD and 3G
with no loss of M/E or DVE functionality.

9.2.3 Output Setup

This menu is where each BNC output from the Kula mainframe is setup, within these menus
the user is able to:
• Name and give a Description to each BNC output
• Setup ISO Tally’s for each BNC output
• Assign DSKs
• Assign the Bi-directional Inputs and Outputs
The default setting for all outputs is as an Aux output, this can be user-defined by changing
any of the outputs to become one of the 4 Multiviewer Heads.
Important: All multiviewer outputs are set to 1080p video standard irrespective of the system
standard, but the frame rate is set by the system standard.
For example, if the system standard is 1080i/59.94, then the multiviewer output is
1080p/59.94.
Please make sure that any HD-SDI to HDMI or DVI converters being used are capable of
receiving 1080p and the monitor being used is also capable of receiving 1080p.
Outputs 13 to 18 are the “Bi-directional” Inputs/Outputs. By default, they are outputs but when
using the DSK selection buttons, the following happens:
• Selecting 2 DSKs - Makes O/P 17/18 into Inputs (2M/E mainframe I/P 37 and I/P 38)
(1M/E mainframe I/P 19 and I/P 20).
• Selecting 3 DSKs - Makes O/P 15, 16, 17 and 18 into Inputs (2M/E mainframe I/P 37,
38, 39 and 40) (1M/E mainframe I/P 19, 20, 21 and 22).
• Selecting 4 DSKs - Makes O/P 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 into Inputs (2M/E main-
frame I/P 37, 38, 39, 40, 41 and 42) (1M/E mainframe I/P 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 and 24).

9.2.3.1 Parameter Controls
Name - A user-defined name can be given to each output for reference.
SMPTE 352 Payload - This parameter specifies a “payload packet” which can be included in
a serial stream as ancillary data. This indicates such things as the video standard, picture
rate, aspect ratio etc. of the video signal that stream carries. The button turns it on and off on
each output.
HANC/VANC - Ancillary Data can be output from any BNC output on the mainframe. These
buttons are used to either pass or block the ancillary data on each individual output.
The Kula is able to receive Ancillary Data and pass the ancillary data out from any BNC
outputs from the mainframe.
The ancillary data is part of the horizontal and vertical blanking portion of the video signal and
is known as HANC (Horizontal Ancillary Data) and VANC (Vertical Ancillary Data). The
portion of the ancillary data we are interested in is Embedded Audio.
The embedded audio will usually be in the HANC portion of the video signal, and is the most
likely way that embedded audio data is received. There can also be other forms of information
embedded in the HANC data; such as, SMPTE 352 Payload identifier or SMPTE 2051
two-frame marker.
VANC is also able to carry embedded audio in the form of Dolby ETM, VANC also carries other
ancillary data; such as video standard, aspect ratio, content name etc.
Where Embedded Audio can be used:
The embedded audio can pass directly from input BNC to output BNC, or video containing the
embedded audio can be grabbed from a crosspoint into a Store. The software allows just the
audio to be grabbed separately from the video. This is setup using the Grab Crosspoint
parameter in the Store Grab menu, where the audio has been setup on a crosspoint and then
using the Grab Crosspoint parameter on a selected M/E, use the “Grab Audio” button to
grab the required embedded audio.
The other method of importing video with embedded audio into a ClipStore is using K-Watch
application software, in the Filing System Import Export menu.

Output Assignment - This allows the user to change an output to become a Multiviewer
Head.
Number of DSKs - As mentioned above, selecting DSKs will change the bi-directional
input/outputs into inputs.
Bi-directional Mode - This allows the user to individually change Outputs 13 to 18 into
Inputs.
9.2.3.2 Output Tally
The GPO Tallies can be set to provide up to 8 further output Tallies ISO1 to ISO8. These can
be used to Tally outputs that are being used as ISO (isolation) Feeds.
ISO Tally’s can be used for example in a studio situation where studio cameras are recording
live and/or live to disk or tape. The ISO tally can be used to signal if a camera is live, or
recording.
Tally Now sets the tally for the on-air Sources. Set this for the PGM output.
Tally Next - This sets the Tally for the next on-air source. Set this for the PVW Output.

9.2.4 System Standard

The system standard menu; as the name suggests, is where the default video standard is set
for the Kula system.
Important: The Kula mainframe must have a Reference signal applied to the “Ref In” BNC on the
mainframe.
The system standard is set to a default, to change the standard use the “New Standard”
parameter to scroll up/down through the list of video standards. When the required standard
is reached, notice the {Apply Standard} button has turned orange, press the “Apply
Standard” button and a new system standard is set.
Genlock - Switch Genlock On, if the standard set for the selected Reference Input is not
compatible with the system standard.
Genlock Phase sets the timing of the input router cut point relative to the genlock reference.
Reference Status - The information refers to the analogue Ref input.+
• Genlocked - Yes = genlocked
• Tri Sync - Yes = horizontal/vertical sync detected
• Interlaced - Yes = interlaced, No = Progressive.
• Frame Rate = frame rate in Hz
The mainframe will not genlock if the standard of the reference is incompatible with the
system standard. (Compatible means same 1/2 or 2x).
Action On Next Field: all actions on next TV field.
Action On Field 1: sources cut on field 1 only, all other actions on next field.
Action On Field 2: sources cut on field 2 only, all other actions on next field.

9.2.5 GPO
This is a “source” based GPO setup menu, meaning that it is used to tally on sources coming
into the Kula mainframe.
GPI/O Select is used to scroll down the table through the individual GPI/O/Tally’s, the Name
parameter allows the user to re-name the tally if required. The default table is a one-to-one
connection; Tally to Input.
Source - parameter is used to assign a tally to another input as required
9.2.5.1 GPO Enables
Source Now - This sets the GPO to be a tally for On Air Sources.
Source Next - This sets the GPO to be a Tally for the next on air source. Source next is
determined by which sources are just one transition away, including any M/E re-entry. E.g. If
M/E2 is set to look at M/E1 the next configuration will indicate the next sources, including
Keys, in the M/E2 transitions, as well as the next sources in the M/E1 transition.
Source ISO/ISO8 - This sets the GPO to be an ISO (Isolated) tally for On Air Sources.
Red Indicator - If GPO 1 is set to look at a Source and its State is Closed the light for GPO 1
will be Red.
Note: The GPO Enables have to be set for each GPO for the parameter to be actually used.
Eng Enable and Eng/User Combine OR/AND - Performs a logical 'ANDing' or ORing' of the
GPO Enables. This defines the combined event, which will trigger a GPO and GPI.

9.2.6 IP Gateways
The Engineering Config - IP Gateway menu allows the user to add a route to a destination
network through a local IP Gateway.
Touch the IP Address of Gateway attacher and set the four New Gateway parts of the
address (A) (e.g. 172.28.1.6). Note. The network part of this address must exactly match the
network part of the panel’s IP address.
Next press the IP address of Destination Network attacher and set the four parts of the
destination network address (e.g. 172.23.0.0) and set the number of bits of the netmask for
the destination network.
Finally, press Add Gateway to add the new gateway to the list at the top of the menu. This
has now told the panel how to send a message onto network 2, but not where it should go
when it gets there.
To check that the gateway is attached to the network and is responding, press the {Ping
Gateway} action button. The box below the button should show the ping round-trip time for a
few seconds followed by:
“Good” “Fair” may give occasional “Lumpy” controls
“Poor” may have excessive lumpy controls and cause a loss of comms, “Failed” no link at all.
Press {Remove Gateway} then make the required changes to the five parameters, then
press {Add Gateway} to put the modified entry back into the list.
Pressing either of the {Edit} for the Gateway or destination IP addresses will display a number
entry pad. Enter the required IP address and the touch the {Apply} button.

9.2.7 Protocols
The Protocols menu is used to set parameters for bi-directional communication with external
devices either by one of the RJ45 RS422 ports or selecting one of the IP protocol
connections.
Protocols have to be setup in this menu before the Peripherals functions can be used.
There are 5 Protocol Types to choose from; Tally & UMD, Router, Playout, Editor and
Miscellaneous. Each protocol type has a number of available sub-protocols to choose from,
that allows the users to connect to a large number of different types of external equipment.
9.2.7.1 Selecting and setting up a Protocol
Using the Loaded Protocol parameter, select a free row in the Loaded Protocols table, then
use the Protocol Type parameter is used to scroll through the protocol sets.
Once the required Protocol Type has been selected, use the Available Protocol parameter
to scroll to the required protocol and then touch the {Load} button.

After the Load button was touched, the selected protocol is placed in the Loaded Protocols
table, touch the {Configure} button to enter the Protocol Config menu.
The user is able to select the type of connection that is required “Transport Type” i.e Serial or
IP, and also set user-defined parameters for the protocol.
The Settings - Default as the name suggests is the default setup to communicate with an
external device (normally this would default to “RS422 Port”). If a specific setup is needed,
press the {User} button in the Settings parameter, the user is now able to setup the protocol
as required.
When the parameters have been set correctly press the {Apply} button. The menu will now
return to the main Protocols menu.

The {Activate} button will be yellow, if happy with the setup, touch the {Activate} button. The
protocol setup information is displayed on the right side of the menu.

9.2.8 Status Monitor

The Status Monitor function monitors the overall health of the mainframe allowing the user to
easily see any problems in the unlikely event that the Kula mainframe should have a fault.
The main status monitor menu displays all the internal cards in the mainframe, the power
supplies, fans and Rear Cards.
The Mainframe Cards - Base Card menu displays the voltage and current on the card, the
table displays the operating voltage and current at the present time, and the max/min. values
that have been reached during the boards working life. The Alarm is set to On so that if the
voltage or current goes over a value specified by the factory then the alarm will go off and the
warning box at the top left of the menu will have a warning note.
The warning will be displayed in all menus while using the system until something is done to
sort the problem out.
Top right of the menu, information related to the SATA hard drive is also displayed, and below,
the fan speed of the 4 fans at the front of the mainframe.

Pressing the {CPU} button in the menu will display the current operating temperature of the
CPU, the board temperature and all the voltages related to the CPU.
The other monitor menus within status monitor all work in a similar way all giving similar
information to the user.
9.2.8.1 Panel
The Status Monitor - Panel menu allows the user to monitor the CPU temperature in the KPP
and KPX control surfaces.
The user is also able to setup the SysLog Server IP address so that an external PC running
SysLog Server software can monitor Kula. (please read the next section of this manual).

9.2.8.2 Status Monitor Panel - SysLog Server
The Kula family of switchers and control panels are now capable of using an external Syslog
server to save its diagnostic output. In the unlikely event of there being a problem with a Kula
system, Syslog can be used to display error log files.
9.2.8.3 Connection
To use Syslog, a computer needs to be connected to the Kula mainframe via one of the
network ports (as shown below).
9.2.8.4 IP address
The next thing to find out is the IP address of the computer being used. If the IP address is not
static, then open a Command Prompt.
If using a WindowsTM operating system for example, in the command prompt window type:
>Ipconfig /all
In the message list look for:
“Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection”
Then look for “IPv4 Address” It will show (for example) 192.28.7.7
Make a note of this address.

9.2.8.5 Kula Setup
The next, setup the connection between the computer and the Kula mainframe.
Touch the {ENG CONFIG} menu link button, then touch the {Status Monitor...} menu link
button.
Then in the “Status Monitor” main menu touch {Panel} menu link button where the SysLog
Server parameter controls are displayed.

Touch the {Edit IP Address}, then enter the IP address of the computer.
In the menu, use the “IP Port” parameter to set the port number. It is set to “514” as a default,
but it can be changed to a user defined number.
Set the “Enable” parameter to “Yes”.
9.2.8.6 Syslog Application
There are many Syslog servers available on the Internet, they are suitable for a variety of
platforms (Windows, Linux, OS etc).
This example uses a generic Syslog Server application.

Once installed open the Syslog application.
Select setup.

Enable UDP Listener, then set the IP Address to be that of the computer. Set the port number
to be 514 (or what ever it was set to on Kula).
Note: Usually, Syslog servers will use UDP port #514, although they will offer the ability to
change this port, allowing the same machine to run multiple Syslog servers simultaneously.
Click on {OK} and the Syslog software should now start receiving messages from Kula.

The job of a Syslog server is to open up a network port and log all Syslog format messages
that are received at the port; in this example from Kula. Usually, messages are recorded
continuously into a file or files on the disk.
The log file may be restricted to a maximum size and can either be used as a circular-buffer or
a new file can be started when the maximum size is exceeded or when a time duration has
passed (e.g. start new file each week or if the file exceeds 10Mbytes).
Logged messages can be color-coded by severity. They can also be filtered and sorted by
who sent them, their severity, time stamp etc.
9.2.8.7 Setup Menu
The Status Monitor - Setup menu allows the user to set the maximum values for
temperature, voltage and fan warnings before the alarm status is reached.
The default setting for all the alarms is set to 80% of the factory maximum limit.
The warning message can be changed to what ever is needed; the temperature scale can be
changed and the real time clock set.
9.2.8.8 Messages
The Status Monitor - Message History menu will display a history of any significant events or
hardware warnings with the time and date against them.
In the unlikely event of a problem, this menu can be used as a high level review of any
possible failures. For more detailed information please use the Export Status Log Files
option in the Mainframe Configuration menu.


9.2.9 FormatFusion3TM
The FormatFusion3TM controls allow the user to change the aspect of an input source, this
would be used for example if a portion of an HD source needs to be cropped and stretched to
fit a 16:9 format or an SD 4:3 source aspect has to change to fit a 16:9 output.
9.2.9.1 FormatFusion3 Initial Setup
The initial setup of FormatFusion3 is done in the logged off state in the “Mainframe Config
menu. The user can select 4 or 8 channels of FormatFusion3 by selecting FormatFusion3
instead of SME1 (4 channels) and FormatFusion3 instead of SME2 (8 channels) as shown
below.

9.2.10 Input FormatFusion3 Inputs and Channels

To use FormatFusion3, touch the {Input Setup...} button, then in the menu, select an input by
touching an input row or use the “BNC Input” parameter. Once selected, set the “User
Default Standard” parameter to “No” and set the “Auto Standard” parameter to “On”. This
must be done for each input that requires FormatFusion3.
In the Engineering Config menu, touch the {FormatFusion3...} button to open the menu. The
table at the top of the menu displays the available channels of FormatFusion3. There are 4
Channels when SME1 has been de-selected in the Mainframe Config menu and 8 Channels
when both SME1/SME2 have been de-selected.
Each of the channels of FormatFusion3 in the table are individually enabled by setting the
“Enable” parameter to “On”.

FormatFusion3 can now be assigned to any of the internal Buses, including M/E Buses. This
means all sources selected on the M/E will be synchronized. This gives the ability to
synchronize all incoming sources.
In the Engineering Config - Format Fusion menu, set the “Bus Mode” parameter to “On”.
The “Bus” parameter controls will turn on allowing the user to touch the “Popup” button to
open the popup menu. The user can now select between M/E Key, M/E Bgnd and M/E Util
Buses for the selected M/E. This can be done on a channel by channel basis.
As mentioned earlier, if the user selects for example “ME 1 Bgnd A” all sources selected on
that Bus will now be synchronized.

Source Input Setup

Source - This selects the BNC Input.
Use Default Standard - This parameter will force the input source to use the default
mainframe video standard which is set in the Eng Config - System Standard menu. The
Default Standard can be changed using the New Standard parameter, use the Up/Down
scroll buttons to select the required standard, then touch the {Apply} button.
Auto Standard - The video standard for the incoming source can be set to the default
mainframe video standard or changed to a new standard using the {Auto Standard} button
which will allow the system to “auto detect” the incoming source video standard and will keep
the original video standard of the incoming source.
Input
Interlaced Source - This has 4 parameter settings, these settings are listed below:
Automatic is the default setting for Interlaced Source it is the most suitable mode for live
programme making. When creating the current field/frame, the automatic setting will use the
current input field and a percentage of both the previous and next input fields. Typically used
when the output of a camera is fed to the switcher as a continuous stream of footage.

Video Pair is used when creating the current field/frame, will use the current input field and a
percentage of either the previous or next field to maintain 1-2 or 2-1 pairing. This could be
used for pre-prepared material with cuts on known field boundaries to prevent possible subtle
artifacts appearing at cut points.
Film Pair is used when creating the current field/frame, will directly combine the current input
field and either the previous or next field. This mode should only be used if the fields are
temporarily matched, e.g. PAL film based sources or some animation.
Single Field is used when creating the current field/frame, will only use the current input field.
The Field Dominance control selects which field comes first. The Normal setting is the
default field setting for the input standard, the Reversed setting should only be used to
correct sources that have incorrect field order (swapped fields). Swapped fields will manifest
as very jittery motion.
The Vertical Softness control, this feature allows the user to visually “soften” the source on
the selected input. Generally, this control is not required and should be set to 0% for the best
de-interlacing quality. it is de-activated in Automatic mode, the function will work in Video Pair,
Film Pair and Single Field modes.
Note: Field Dominance and Vertical Softness can only be used with selected Interlaced Source
settings.
The Crop adjustments allow the user to crop areas of the image that may need to be hidden
from view. Adjustments can be made to the Top, Bottom, Left and Right of the image.
When the Stretch To Fit parameter is enabled the cropped picture content will stretched to fill
the 16:9 area.
With the Preserve Aspect parameter is enabled, this will maintain the aspect ratio of the
image e.g. If you crop left and right the image will zoom vertically to compensate. If a source
has become very distorted or stretched, this function will adjust the source outwards from the
center in all directions creating a 'zoom in' effect.
Note: This may cause a very small amount of the source material around the edge of the source
to be lost.

Output
Aspect Mode has 3 settings: Zoom, Full Width and Full Height. The Zoom parameter
allows the source to be zoomed out to fill the 16:9 aspect, when the source is zoomed to 16:9;
it will appear slightly larger. The zoom function will not work if the aspect is set to Full Width or
Full Height.
The Full Width parameter changes the aspect so that the full width of the 16:9 aspect is filled,
in this setting a letter box effect is seen where there are bars at the top and bottom of the
image.
The Full Height parameter will change the aspect so that the full height of the 16:9 aspect
ratio is filled, leaving bars either side of the image.
Zoom, X and Y Position - Will allow the source to be re-positioned within the 16:9 space.
Original 4:3 Source on a 16:9 With Full Width Applied

background
With Full Height Applied With Zoom Applied to fill 16:9

Aspect

Anti-Alias Filter - is used to vertically soften interlaced outputs. This will reduce line 'twitter'
and 'jaggies', replicating the vertical filtering that would normally happen in an interlaced
camera. This is particularly useful on SD outputs.
• Off - will never apply the filter.
• Auto - will apply the filter when the output is interlaced and not the same standard as
the input.
• On - will always apply the filter.
Filter Strength - 0.0 is the normal amount of filtering but the user can choose a bit more or a
bit less than this if required.
4:3 Letterbox - This function is only available when the video standard is changed to an SD
standard. It changes the aspect ratio of the picture to a letterbox format.
If the video standard is changed to a HD/1080p, this function will automatically turn off.

9.2.10.1 Color Correction
Input FormatFusion3 color correction allows the user to color correct a selected
Channel/Input.
To use Color Correction, turn “On” the Color Correction parameter and touch the {Color
Correction...} menu link button.
In the Color Effects menu, make sure that the “Color Fx” button is selected, from here the
user can select the type of color correction required.
9.2.10.2 YUV
Touch the {YUV} button to enable the parameter controls. Touch the YUV Control attacher
and by changing the parameters, the Brightness, Contrast and Saturation of the channel can
be adjusted.
• Brightness default value is 0.00%, and the range is from -10% to 100%
• Contrast default value is 1.00%, and the range is from -0% to 16%
• Saturation default value is 1.00%, and the range is from -0% to 16%

As each of the above are adjusted notice that the percentage of adjustment is shown in the
YUV attacher.
9.2.10.3 Bleed
Color bleed is a situation where a single color will over power the other colors in the RGB
signal. By using the bleed function the stronger color can be softened to make the color
output more natural, or adjusted to suit a specific need.
The initial menu has a default state where a single adjustment for each parameter menu is
active; this will allow the adjustment of the main RGB bleed parameters:
• Red into Red
• Green into Green
• Blue into Blue
Touch one of the Bleed color blocks to enable all the options for that color. This will allow a
detailed adjustment for each of the R, G and B bleed settings. The adjustments are measured
on a -100% to a +100% scale. Each parameter menu will adjust a single color, i.e. red into
red, green into red and blue into red. These changes are also reflected graphically in the RGB
bar graphs above the parameter sets.

9.2.10.4 RGB
Touch the “RGB” button to enable the parameter controls. The initial menu is set to a default
condition, which Shows the Master adjustment parameters. This will give an adjustment of
Master Lift, Gain and Gamma. Each of these adjustments will alter all three elements of the
RGB signal at the same time.
When one of the master parameters is altered, notice that the RGB curve profile changes in
the graph situated center of the menu.
Touching one of the attachers allows a more accurate adjustment to the RGB components
where the:
RGB Lift - parameters adjust the images Black Level, working on Black or shadow areas.
RGB Gamma - parameters adjust the levels between dark/shadow and the mid tones, where
the mid tones become brighter or darker; depending on the adjustment made.
RGB Gain - parameters control the White level or highlights, where brighter colors become
brighter or darker; depending on the adjustment made.
RGB S Gain and S Center - the parameters adjust the gain mid tone levels of the S curve
and the center point levels of the s curve.

9.2.10.5 Presets
Presets allow the user to quickly select commonly used preset color options for the crosspoint
source, or quickly revert back to the original input source color levels.
Normal - Is the original color levels of the input source; without any color correction
adjustments.
B & W - Sets the chroma saturation to zero removing the chroma content, making the signal
black and white.
Sepia - Sets the chroma saturation to zero removing the chroma content, then adds positive
portions of Red and Green and a negative portion of Blue to make-up a sepia appearance.
Inverse - Inverts the video signal making the picture a negative of its correct colors.
If the Normal preset option is selected, then all color correction controls are Grayed out
preventing any adjustments. This is to make sure that the original crosspoint source can be
recalled.
If B&W, Sepia and Inverse are selected, the preset levels can all be color corrected.

9.2.10.6 Curves
The Curves function is used to artistic type effect to the selected FormatFusion3 channel. The
user can select preset effects such as Solarize and Posterize, and then adjust them to give a
user-defined effect.
The user can select from 6 Preset Curve options by touching the button or use the Type
parameter to select from a list of options.
Touch the top attacher, the Level parameter changes the level of effect on the selected
channel, from a normal looking source to an extreme manipulation effect with full effect.
The Type parameter as mentioned above selects the type of Curve effect.
When the Steps parameter is adjusted, the more steps there are in an effect, the less
extreme the effect will appear.
In the bottom attacher there are 3 parameters that can be used to modify a selected preset
curve, not all of the parameters work with all of the preset curves.
Threshold is used to change the shadow and highlight values of the selected preset curve,
Frequency determines the number repeated occurrences are applied to the effect. The final
parameter is Phase, this adjusts the effect starting point within the Step cycle.

9.2.11 Output FormatFusion3

Any output from the mainframe can be assigned to have Output FormatFusion3 by utilizing
the 8 available FormatFusion3 channels.
By default the 8 FormatFusion3 channels are set as “Input FormatFusion3”, when
FormatFusion3 is enabled in the Mainframe Config menu (in the logged out state).
When FormatFusion3 is enabled, go to the Engineering Config - FormatFusion3 menu. The

user can now assign the “Source” parameter from being an “InputBNC” to being an “Aux”, the
selected channel will now become an output with FormatFusion3.

9.2.11.1 Output FormatFusion3 Setup
As shown earlier, turn on FormatFusion3 in the Mainframe Config menu (in the logged out
state). There are two FormatFusion3 buttons, enabling 1 will give 4 channels of
FormatFusion3 enabling both of them will give 8 channels.
To use FormatFusion3, touch the {Input Setup...} button, then in the menu, select an input by
touching an input row or use the “BNC Input” parameter. Once selected, set the “User
Default Standard” parameter to “No” and set the “Auto Standard” parameter to “On”. This
must be done for each input that requires FormatFusion3.
In the Engineering Config menu, touch the {FormatFusion3...} button to open the menu. The
table at the top of the menu displays the available channels of FormatFusion3. There are 4
Channels when SME1 has been de-selected in the Mainframe Config menu and 8 Channels
when both SME1/SME2 have been de-selected.

Each of the channels of FormatFusion3 in the table are individually enabled by setting the
“Enable” parameter to “On”.
For each channel of “Output” FormatFusion3 required, select the channel in the table then
use the “Popup” selector to select the Aux output.
Note: Remember that there are only 12 Outputs if all 4 DSKs are selected in the Engineering
Config - Input Setup menu.

9.2.11.2 Parameter Controls
Input
Interlaced Source - This has 4 parameter settings, these settings are listed below:
Automatic is the default setting for Interlaced Source it is the most suitable mode for live
programme making. When creating the current field/frame, the automatic setting will use the
current input field and a percentage of both the previous and next input fields. Typically used
when the output of a camera is fed to the switcher as a continuous stream of footage.
Video Pair is used when creating the current field/frame, will use the current input field and a
percentage of either the previous or next field to maintain 1-2 or 2-1 pairing. This could be
used for pre-prepared material with cuts on known field boundaries to prevent possible subtle
artifacts appearing at cut points.
Film Pair is used when creating the current field/frame, will directly combine the current input
field and either the previous or next field. This mode should only be used if the fields are
temporarily matched, e.g. PAL film based sources or some animation.
Single Field is used when creating the current field/frame, will only use the current input field.
The Field Dominance control selects which field comes first. The Normal setting is the
default field setting for the input standard, the Reversed setting should only be used to
correct sources that have incorrect field order (swapped fields). Swapped fields will manifest
as very jittery motion.
The Vertical Softness control, this feature allows the user to visually “soften” the source on
the selected input. Generally, this control is not required and should be set to 0% for the best
de-interlacing quality. it is de-activated in Automatic mode, the function will work in Video Pair,
Film Pair and Single Field modes.
Note: Field Dominance and Vertical Softness can only be used with selected Interlaced Source
settings.

The Crop adjustments allow the user to crop areas of the image that may need to be hidden
from view. Adjustments can be made to the Top, Bottom, Left and Right of the image.
When the Stretch To Fit parameter is enabled the cropped picture content will stretched to fill
the 16:9 area.
With the Preserve Aspect parameter is enabled, this will maintain the aspect ratio of the
image e.g. If you crop left and right the image will zoom vertically to compensate. If a source
has become very distorted or stretched, this function will adjust the source outwards from the
center in all directions creating a 'zoom in' effect.
Note: This may cause a very small amount of the source material around the edge of the source
to be lost.

Output
Aspect Mode has 3 settings: Zoom, Full Width and Full Height. The Zoom parameter
allows the source to be zoomed out to fill the 16:9 aspect, when the source is zoomed to 16:9;
it will appear slightly larger. The zoom function will not work if the aspect is set to Full Width or
Full Height.
The Full Width parameter changes the aspect so that the full width of the 16:9 aspect is filled,
in this setting a letter box effect is seen where there are bars at the top and bottom of the
image.
The Full Height parameter will change the aspect so that the full height of the 16:9 aspect
ratio is filled, leaving bars either side of the image.
Zoom, X and Y Position - Will allow the source to be re-positioned within the 16:9 space.
Original 4:3 Source on a 16:9 With Full Width Applied

background
With Full Height Applied With Zoom Applied to fill 16:9

Aspect

Anti-Alias Filter - is used to vertically soften interlaced outputs. This will reduce line 'twitter'
and 'jaggies', replicating the vertical filtering that would normally happen in an interlaced
camera. This is particularly useful on SD outputs.
• Off - will never apply the filter.
• Auto - will apply the filter when the output is interlaced and not the same standard as
the input.
• On - will always apply the filter.
Filter Strength - 0.0 is the normal amount of filtering but the user can choose a bit more or a
bit less than this if required.
9.2.11.3 Output Standard
The selected Aux Output, because it has had FormatFusion3 applied can now be set to a
different video standard from the System Standard.
Use the “New Standard” parameter to select a new video standard, then touch the {Apply
Standard} button.
Note: New video standard selection options will be the same frame rate as the selected System
Standard.

9.2.11.4 Color Correction
Output FormatFusion3 color correction allows the user to color correct a selected
Channel/Aux Output.
To use Color Correction, turn “On” the Color Correction parameter and touch the {Color
Correction...} menu link button.
9.2.11.5 YUV
be adjusted.

YUV attacher.
9.2.11.6 Bleed
• Red into Red
• Blue into Blue

9.2.11.7 RGB
where the:

9.2.11.8 Presets
adjustments.
black and white.
recalled.

9.2.11.9 Curves
The Curves function is used to artistic type effect to the selected FormatFusion3 channel. The
user can select preset effects such as Solarize and Posterize, and then adjust them to give a

9.3 User Configuration
9.3.1 M/E Outputs

Kula has a maximum of 18 outputs, all of which are programmable. This means that the user
is not restricted and can assign any one of the outputs to be an M/E an SME output or an Aux
output. All M/E outputs are programmable which means that the outputs can be configured
and their states changed; in this menu, to suit the users needs.
The Table:
Output - The number of M/Es/SMEs in system.
Name - This is the user assigned name for the M/E output
Background - This sets up which bus/buses are used as the background.
Black= Background will always be black
A/B = The main A and B buses will be used as the backgrounds in transitions.
A= Just background A will be used and the background will not transition
B= Just background B will be used and the background will not transition
U1/U2 = Utility Bus 1 and Utility Bus 2 will be used as the background and transition
with the selected background transition or this output. Util1 and Util 2 crosspoints can
be selected on the main panel.
U1 or U2 = Just Utility Bus 1 or 2 will be used and the background will not transition
Ancillary - Use this parameter to tell the M/E where and when to handle the Audio using
Ancillary from parameter to set the “Audio to Follow” the following options:
Off - No HANC/VANC from M/E output.
PGM- HANC/VANC will come from Program Bus Source.
PGM + Clip- HANC/VANC will come from Program Bus Source until MAVTrans is done
and then if the MAVTrans has Audio the HANC will cut to the MAVTrans audio
MAVTrans audio.
PGM Early - HANC/VANC will come from the B Bus as soon as you start the transition
the once complete the A Bus (Which will now be what was the B Bus)

PGM Early + Clip - HANC/VANC will come from A Bus then as soon as the MAVTrans
transition starts the Audio on from the Clip (if it has Audio, HANC) then from PST until
the transition complete.
PST- HANC/VAN always from B Bus.
PST + Clip - HANC/VANC from B Bus other than during a MAVTrans with Audio
PST Early - HANC/VANC from B Bus or A bus during transition.
PST Early + Clip - HANC /VANC B Bus, or PGM during bgnd trans, or HANC from clip
during MAVTrans if clip has audio
Bus A - HANC/VANC From A
Bus B- HANC/VANC From B
Util 1 - HANC/VANC From always from Util 1
Util 1 + Clip - HANC/VANC will come from the Util 1 Bus until a MAVTrans transition is
done and then if the MAVTrans has Audio the HANC will cut to the MavTrans audio.
Util 2 - HANC/VANC From always from Util 2
Util 2 + Clip - HANC/VANC will come from the Util 2 Bus until a MAVTrans transition is
done and then if the MAVTrans has Audio the HANC will cut to the MAVTrans audio.
Clip - From MAVTrans (only during transition - No HANC outside of Transition)
Key1 to Key4 - These columns determine what Keys will appear on the M/E output.
Off = This Key will NOT appear on this output
Program = The Key is available on this output as determined by the transition status
on the main panel
On = The Key will always be present on this output. The main transition will NOT be
able to remove it.
Preview Of- This sets this output to be a Preview for the M/E output you select. Previews can
be re-entered but there will be no tally. Once you have selected this option all options to the
right of this will have no effect.

Key Of - This sets this output to be a Key Only for the output selected. Once you have
selected this option all options to the right of this will have no effect. It is normal in this case
that the background for the output you want this to be the Key for is set to Black. E.g. OP2 in
this row would set this output to be the Key for output 2 of this M/E.

9.3.2 Store Setup

The Store Setup menu allows the user to setup the way the Stores are coupled when using a
clip. The allocation of time to each Store can also be setup in this menu and the Stores can
also be given names.
9.3.2.1 Coupling & Linking
The Coupling & Linking menu allows the user to setup Stores which contain video clips or
“Bugs”, which are for example Keyed over a background where the Key source can be made
to be transparent.
To do this the clip has to have a Key and Fill source coupled together over 2 Stores, this is
done in the Store Coupling & Linking menu.
In the table above, Stores 1 - 10 can be seen.
Store Coupling - the Key column is the Key Store that is coupled to the Fill Store. The Fill
column is the Fill Store that is coupled to the Key Store.
For example, in the table above, Store 9 has a Key that is Key Store 10 coupled to Fill Store
9. In the Store Contents menu it will look like this:
Store 9 is coupled to KStore 10, as can be seen in the minipics 9 and 10.

Linked To Store - this will display any Stores that are linked to each other.
Store Name - this is the user-defined name given to a Store, using the “Store Name”
parameter.
Audio in Reverse - to select “Audio In Reverse”, select a Store in the table and then touch
the {Audio In Reverse} button. The selected row will display “Yes”. This means that when a
clip is played in reverse, if the clip has an audio file associated with it, the audio will still play
when the clip is played in reverse, but the audio will not be played in reverse.

9.3.3 Aux Setup

This menu allows the user to setup DSK’s (Down Stream Keys) and Fade to Black on each of
the outputs from the mainframe.
The table in the menu displays what is setup on each output from the mainframe. The
Source/Usage column displays the type of signal output that is on each BNC, i.e. PGM, PVW,
Clean or Multiviewer Head etc. The 4 DSK columns display which outputs the DSKs are
enabled on, by default DSK 1 is always selectable, DSKs 2 to 4 are only available to select if
they are enabled in the Eng Config - Outputs menu.
Note: Further information on DSKs can be seen in the “Operator Information - DSKs” chapter in
this manual,
9.3.3.1 Fade To Black
The Fade To Black function is normally needed when a live broadcast has a problem, it would
be used to take the programme output to “Black”.
To use fade to black, enable FTB by selecting Fade To Black - “Pgm”.
The above parameter controls alter the FTB profile and transition timing.

Profile - The Profile parameter control will adjust the FTB transition curve profile. Changing
the curve profile will make the transition accelerate or decelerate at a specific moment in the
FTB transition period. The curve profile can only be used to change the Cubic S/Sin S and
Cubic Curve/Sin Curve profiles, which are selected using the Shape parameter control. The
Linear profile cannot be adjusted.
Shape - Selecting one of the Shape options will depict the type of profile curve, this will alter
the acceleration rate for a FTB transition.
Linear - constant transition, no change in transition acceleration
Cubic C and Sin C - these profiles are similar to each other, the default transition will have a
fast acceleration at the start and slowdown towards the end.
Cubic Curve and Sin Curve - these profiles are also similar to each other, the default
transition will accelerate at the start slow down towards the mid point and accelerate again.
Time - this parameter alters the amount of time that it takes for the FTB to transition. The
parameter adjusts the minutes/seconds, frames and fields.

9.3.4 Resource Linking

This allows the user to Link Buses or M/Es, allowing Buses or M/Es to become “Slaves” of
other Buses or M/Es/SMEs, e.g. M/E2 Key1 crosspoint selection will be mimicked on Aux1.
In the User Config main menu, press the {Resource Linking…} menu button.
9.3.4.1 Bus Linking
Parameter Controls
Bus Select - selects the Master Bus
New Slave Bus - selects the Slave Bus
Slave Select - selects the Slave Link
Substitution Table - assigns Links to a table (1 to 32 available) the selected table is where
the Master Slave bus link will be saved
Overall Enable - turns the bus linking option On/Off
Create New Link - creates a new master/slave link
Delete Link - deletes the selected bus link
Delete All - deletes all master/slave links that have been created

9.3.4.2 Using Bus Linking
To create a Bus Link select the Bus that will become the Master using the Bus Select
parameter control, then select the Slaves to this bus using the New Slave Bus parameter,
then press {Create New Link}.
There are no limits to the number of Slave Buses that can be linked to the Master bus. To
delete a Link, select the Link using Slave Select parameter, or touch the entry in the Table,
and then press {Delete Link}.
By default the links are 1-1 links e.g. Xpt1 on the Master will select Xpt1on the Slave,
although the bus linking can be further enhanced by use of substitution tables, where new
crosspoint links can be created.
A Substitution Table can be generated where there is no link for some crosspoints (e.g.
selecting a crosspoint on the Master Bus will not select a crosspoint on the Slave Buses), a
single Substitution Table can be used multiple times.
Note: There is an Overall Enable to turn the use of Bus linking On/Off, along with independent
Link Enables
Note: The [UNDO] button on the GUI will reStore the Link. By default the Substitution Table
selected will be “None” (Substitution Table 0) which is a 1 to 1 crosspoint link.

9.3.4.3 Substitution Tables
Substitutions allow the user to substitute a crosspoint for example; select xpt 1 on Master M/E
which in turn selects the substitute Xpt on the slave M/E.
Master/Slave Crosspoint - selects the master/slave crosspoint link. As the crosspoint

mapping is setup, the mapping will be automatically saved into the substitution table
Link Enable - enables/disables individual crosspoint mapping links
ReStore One-to-One - reStores all crosspoint mapping links to their original state (in the
selected substitution table only).

9.3.4.4 Creating a Substitution Table
To create a Substitution Table select {Substitution Tables…}, then select a table number
using the Substitution Tables parameter (this menu allows up to 32 substitution tables to be
generated). The table can then be given a name in the Table Name attacher.
Setup the crosspoint mapping as required, using the Master Crosspoint and Slave Crosspoint
parameters.
The crosspoint set-up is displayed in the table below the Substitution Table, this includes any
link that may need to be disabled. As the crosspoint mapping is setup, this will be
automatically saved in the table.
The Substitution Tables and crosspoint assignments are saved in the User Config File, in the
File System that has a separate Enable for Bus Linking.

9.3.4.5 M/E Linking
M/E Linking works in a very similar way to Bus Linking, M/Es to become “Slaves” of other
Buses or M/Es
Parameter Controls
ME Select - selects the M/E
New Slave ME - selects the Slave M/E
Slave Select - selects the Slave Link
Substitution Table - assigns Links to a table (1 to 32 available) the selected table is where
the Master Slave bus link will be saved
Link Enable - enables/disables the master /slave link
Overall Enable - turns the M/E linking option On/Off
Create New Link - creates a new master/slave link
Delete Link - deletes the selected bus link
Delete All - deletes all master/slave links that have been created

9.4 GPO Setup

This GPO Setup menu is used to tally Crosspoint based, Bus based and User BIT functions.
The default setup state allows the user to tally GPO’s 121 to 256 which are the physical and
internal GPO’s and are comprised of:
GPO 121 to GPO 132 and GPO 133 to GPO 144 are the physical Ref Fin GPO’s, again at the
rear of the mainframe. These GPO’s are system setup dependant; GPO 121 to GPO 132 Ref
Fin A, GPO 133 to GPO 144 Ref Fin B.
GPO 145 to GPO 256 are Internal GPO’s (but the configuration could be GPO 133 to GPO
256 if only 1 Ref Fin is fitted).
The Internal GPO’s are used to trigger internal function such as Macro’s or any internal
function that can be switched On or Off.
This menu allows the user to trigger a GPO or GPI when for example a crosspoint is setup to
trigger a GPO, or an Aux is setup to trigger a Bus tally.
Touch the attacher below the GPO table and the parameters will change allowing the user to
setup a GPO trigger.
For a crosspoint tally for example, use the GPO Select parameter to the required GPO, use
the Crosspoint parameter to select the crosspoint that will trigger the GPO, and then select
the Crosspoint Tally. In the GPO Enables button area of the menu, press the {GPO} button
and each crosspoint trigger will only trigger a GPO, or touch the {Xpt Now} button, then when
the selected crosspoint button (as shown in the menu above) is pressed the GPO will be
triggered.
Note: Touch the popup selector (blue square) in the Crosspoint parameter and a greater
selection of GPO trigger options will be displayed.

9.4.1 Crosspoint Options

When selecting the type of GPO or GPI trigger, as mentioned previously, press the popup
attacher to easily access the other Crosspoint options.

9.4.2 Modulation
9.4.2.1 Overview
The modulation function enables the user to add modulation effects to transitions, wipes,
borders and DVE. The type of modulation applied to a function is selectable and can be
added to many different parameters, whether it is Global, Bus, I/O, DVE or User related.
The modulators are sorted into relevant Groups, determined by their subject matter:
Global Modulators - are used to modulate multiple parameters in a fixed relationship.
M/E Bus Group - displays modulator parameters within a Bus function, such as Transition of
a Keyer.
M/E Trans Group - displays the modulates parameters within the Transition functions.
User Config Group - displays modulated parameters within a User function, such as Mattes.
9.4.3 Global Modulators

Global modulators, as mentioned earlier are used to run modulators globally across the
logical switcher.
An example could be a color effect modulation that would affect all M/Es globally on the
logical switcher.
Global Modulators - Parameter Controls
Name - there are 10 individual modulation setup options in this column, each one can be
given a unique name, by selecting the required row using the Modulator parameter, then
typing the name into the Name attacher.
Type - this is the modulation effect used, either Spin, Sine, Sawtooth, Triangle, Square,
Shake, Linear Drift and Cubic Drift, Static, Bounce and Transition. Preset to start with a Sine
wave modulation.
Run - allows the modulation to run.
Frequency - adjusts the frequency of the modulation, range from 0Hz to 30Hz. Preset to start
at 1Hz
Gain - adjusts the gain of the modulation, range from -100% to +100%. Preset to start at
+50%.

Phase - changes the phase of the modulation, range 360° plus complete turns, i.e. 5:180°
this is 5 complete turns plus 180°.
An individual modulator setup can be switched On, by selecting an individual modulation

using the Modulator parameter. Next, touch one of the On/Off buttons in the Frequency, Gain
or Phase parameter displays.
Notice that “Yes” has now appeared in the Run column of the table.
All the modulator setups in the table can be started by pressing the {All Start} action button,
or stopped by pressing the {ALL STOP} button.
The Transition Select allows the use of the transition engines to control the level of other
parameters. Using the Transition modulator type it is possible to use the AUTO and T Bar to
control the level of a particular parameter.
If a Transition type Modulator is attached to a 'Store Pan H position' for example, the Store is
then used as a Utility Wipe Border; when the Bgnd Transition takes place the T Bar moves the
picture within the Store at the same time as the wipe edge.
To choose which T Bar controls the movement of the modulated parameter, select the M/E.
By determining a Bgnd or Key Bus the modulation will only take effect when that Bgnd or Key
bus is selected in the transition.

The modulator Gain can be used to adjust how much effect the transition engine has on the
modulated parameter. Global Modulators as well as Bus and User Config group modulators
can all use the Transition type modulator.
When using the transition modulator, the transition type needs to be selected (e.g. M/E2
Key1, M/E1 Background etc.) this is the parameter that will be controlled by the modulator.
9.4.3.1 Bus Config Group
This is a modulation applied to a parameter that will affect a Bus e.g. transition wipe, Bus
color and Keyer parameters, and is for example applied to a Key on an M/E.
Touch the {Bus Config Group} menu link button to enter the Modulators - Bus Config
Group menu.
The table in this menu displays the modulation setup:
Modulator - this column will show if the modulation is Local to the Bus Config group or if it is
attached to a Global Modulators setup (displayed as Mod 1 - 10 or named if setup in the
Global Modulators menu).
Touch the Modulator attacher box (center of the menu), three parameters will appear. Use
the Attachment parameter to scroll through and select a modulator setup in the table, then
use the Modulator parameter to select if the modulation is “Local” to the Bus Group or
attached to a Global Modulators setup. The Transition Select allows the use of the
transition engines to control the level of other parameters.
Local Type - this is the type of modulation effect, notice that when the Modulator parameter is
changed from Local to a Global Modulation the text in the Local Type, Run and Freq columns
turns Gray and will not have any affect in the Local setup.
Run, Freq, Gain and Phase - these parameters have the same affect on a modulation setup
as described on the previous page.
Local Frequency and Local Type parameters will only affect a modulation setup in the Bus
Config Group.
Parameter - this column displays the Bus that the modulation effect is attached to.
Parameter Details - this named box displays the actual function that the modulation is
attached to for the selected Bus modulation in the table.
All Start/ALL STOP - as described on the previous page, this function will set all the
modulation setups in the table to run or stop.

Detach - this will delete a selected modulation setup in the table.
9.4.4 User Config Group

The menu below works in exactly the same way as the Bus Config Group. They all have a
“Local” type modulation setup or can be attached to a Global Modulations setup.
The User Config Group modulators are attached to parameters in the Output Color and
Mattes & Washes menus.

9.4.5 Basic How to Use Modulators

How to Use the Modulator Function
The setup sequence will follow these easy steps:
1. Turn On Mod-Assign
2. Select the function the modulation is going to be attached to
3. Select the parameter that the modulation will be attached to
4. Attach the modulator.
2. Select the Function
3. Select the Parameter
1. Turn On Mod Assign 4. Attach the Modulator
Select the function the modulation will affect, then select the parameter the modulation will be
attached to.
Touch and hold the [Mod Assign] button on the GUI, the button will turn green. Select the
parameter that the modulation will affect and touch the green [Mod Assign] button in the
parameter. Notice that the selected parameter display now has a blue sinewave symbol
below the Mod-Assign button.

Also notice that the attacher that displays the parameter settings has turned green as shown
below.
Once the [MOD ASSIGN] and [SNAP NORM] buttons are released the GUI display will jump
to the assigned modulator menu and highlight the attached parameter function in the table
and Parameter Function display box.
The specific modulator setup can now be adjusted.
If a parameter is selected and a modulator cannot be attached to, the {Mod-Assign} button
will not function and the blue sinewave symbol will not appear.

9.4.6 Multiviewer
Important: All multiviewer outputs are set to 1080p standard irrespective of the system standard, but
the frame rate is set by the system standard.
For example, if the system standard is 1080i/59.94, then the multiviewer output is
1080p/59.94.
Please make sure that any HD-SDI to HDMI or DVI converters being used are capable of
receiving 1080p and the monitor being used is also capable of receiving 1080p.
The multiviewer provides great flexibility with its preset and user-defined layouts, and features
the following:
• Up to 4 or 8 flexible output heads (8 heads when in Multiviewer 2 mode)
• Up to 16 Tiles. A further 12 tiles are available when in Multiviewer 2 mode.
• All external and internal sources selectable to all heads and all windows
• Instant preset layouts
• Clear and follow-through labelling
• Red and green tallies
• Assign to any output
• Memorize and recall layouts as part of a show setup.
9.4.7 Setup Multiviewer 2

Before explaining the multiviewer functionality, it is important to know how to access
Multiviewer 2 giving the user access to an extra 4 Multiviewer Heads. The user will have to
log off the switcher by touching the “Up” button, then in the top menu, touch the {Defaults}
button. In the Defaults menu touch the {Log Off From Mainframe} button.

In the “Connect” menu, touch the {Mainframe Config} button. In the Mainframe
Configuration menu, touch the {Multiviewer 2} button.
Important: It is important to understand that when the system has Multiviewer 2 selected, M/E2 is no
longer available.
The button will turn green and the M/E 2 button is grayed out.
When logged back into the system, in the Engineering Config - Output Setup menu, the
user is able to apply a Multiviewer 2 Head to an output.

There are 4 Heads in the Kula multiviewer 1, the heads can have up to 16 tiles assigned to 1
head or 16 tiles assigned across the 4 heads which can be used across different outputs.
These options can also be applied to Multiviewer 2 which also has 4 heads and 12 tiles.
Important: It is important to understand that when the system has Multiviewer 2 setup, M/E2 is no
longer available.
Output from the multiviewer are assigned to outputs from the mainframe like any other output,
this is done in the Engineering Config - Output Setup menu see below.
As shown in the menu diagram above, the user can select an output using the “BNC Output”
parameter, then set the “Output Assignment” parameter one of the multiviewer heads MV1
Head 1 to MV1 Head 4 or MV2 Head 1 to MV2 Head 4 (if Multiviewer 2 has been setup).
This is then displayed as the selected “MV Head” in the output table. If the user now connects
a BNC to the selected output, the multiviewer can be seen.

9.4.8 Setup
Once the multiviewer output has been assigned, the next step is to assign tiles to the
multiviewer heads.
As can be seen in the diagram above, allocating tiles to a multiviewer heads is done using the
“Multiviewer” parameter selects between Multiviewer 1 or 2, “Head” parameter controls are
used to select the required multiviewer heads, then use the “Tiles” parameter to assign tiles to
the head. The number of tiles assigned to a head is important because it will restrict the
number of preset tile layouts and user-defined multiviewer layouts that can be used.
The number of unused tiles are displayed in the “Unused Tile” window.
Overlay On/Off - will turn off the borders around all tiles and background behind the
multiviewer tiles.
Black On/Off - when turned On will make the multiviewer output go black.
The background color behind the multiviewer tiles can be set by the user, touch the
“Background Matte” attacher and use the parameter controls to set the required color.
The background color can now be set using the Hue, Luma and Saturation parameters.
Reset Borders, Tally and Tile - will reset back to the default state, any unsaved setups will
be lost.

9.4.8.1 Presets
The Presets multiviewer layouts displayed in the menu, allow the user to select a multiviewer
tile layout from a list of 24 layouts.
A layout can only be selected if there are enough tiles allocated to the head currently being
used.
To use the preset layouts, make sure there are enough tiles allocated, then simply touch one
of the preset layouts. Once selected, the layout image will light up with a blue boarder around
the tiles.
Note: A user-defined layout can be created by selecting a preset layout and using the “Tile”
menu to reposition and size the tiles where as required.

9.4.8.2 Tile
The Tile menu is used to select sources for the tiles, reposition and resize tiles and set the
boarder and border color around the tiles.
Tile setup is done on an individual tile basis, this is done by making sure that the “Tile”
parameter is turned “On” and then use the “Tile” parameter to scroll through the tiles. The
selected tile is yellow.
The next step is to select the type of source for the selected tile, there are 3 options to select
from the “Content Type” parameter:
• From Crosspoint
• From Source
• From Output
Touch one of the options from the “Content” parameter (Crosspoint, Source or Output), the
user can either scroll through the options for each of the content options, or touch the popup
button and a list of options will appear. The multiviewer content selection has to be done for
each individual tile.

Tiles can be freely moved around the multiviewer screen area using the X, Y and Size
parameters.
Use the parameter controls to position and size the selected tile as required.
The border around the edge of selected tiles can also be changed, touch the border width
parameter to adjust the width of the border around the tiles, then touch the “Border Color”
swatch to open the Hue, Luma and Saturation parameters that allow the user to change the
color of the border.

Touching the “Identify Tiles” button will display in the center of the tile the Tile Number, the
multiviewer and head being used, the source feeding the tile and the output standard. the tile
information will turn off once the button is let go.

9.4.8.3 Tally
The multiviewer tally menu allows the user to setup tally indicators and information for
individual tiles, so that the user is constantly aware of the state of a source to a tile.
Use the “Tile” parameter to select the required tile, the user has the option to display tally
information on a per tile basis or not by using the “Tally” On/Off (green) button.
With the tally option now turned on for the selected tile, the source information is displayed in
the center of the tally box i.e. ME2 OP1 or CAM1 etc. (the source information is automatically
displayed when the sources for the tiles are setup in the Tile menu).
By default the “Tally Auto Font” parameter is set to “On”, this means that for the larger size
tiles have a default font size of 18 point and the smaller tiles have a font size of 10 Point.
If the Auto Font button is set to the “Off” (unlit), then the “Tally Font” parameter can be
used to set the tally font size for the selected tile. The font sizes range from 6 point up to 88
point.
The tally font color can also be changed by using the color parameters and adjusting the Hue,
Luma and Saturation parameters (shown below).
Tally Box Opacity, will change the opacity of the box that the tally information is placed in.
The tally box color can also be changed by using the Tally Box Color Parameters and
adjusting the Hue, Luma and Saturation parameters (shown below).

Tally Position parameter, when the Tally Lamps and Tally are displayed, the user is able to
move the tally indicator position up and down the tile. The options are:
• Bottom (default position) - bottom just inside the tile border
• Under & Border - places the tally indicators below, outside the tile with a border
around the tally indicator as well as the tile
• Under - under the tile with no border
• Top - at the top of the tile just inside the tile border
• Over & Border - places the tally indicators above, outside the tile with a border
around the tally indicator as well as the tile
• Over - at the top of the tile with no border
The “Tally Color In” buttons will switch On or Off individual tally indicators, titles and title
boxes.
Note: When a multiviewer tile is in “Content” mode “Crosspoint” it will display a tally for the
crosspoint Fill and Key, so if either the Fill or the Key of the crosspoint is on-air an on-air
tally will be seen. If a tally for a BNC is required use “Content” mode “Source”.

9.4.9 Title
The Title menu as the name suggests, allows the user to place a title onto the selected tile.
With the “Auto Font” button is turned On, the title font defaults to 18 Point. Turn the Title
Auto Font button off and the font size can be changed using the “Title Font” parameter.
Touch the “Title” name red button twice and use the on-screen keyboard to type in a new title
name.
The Title Color can also be changed by touching the attacher (shown above) and adjusting
the Hue, Luma and Saturation parameters.
The Title Box Opacity parameter changes the opacity of the box that the title sits in. The Title
Box Color can also be changed by touching the attacher and adjusting the Hue, Luma and
Saturation parameters (shown below).
The Title/Title Box for each tile can be freely moved around the multiviewer space, using the
“Title Position X, Y” parameters.

9.5 Panel Config
9.5.1 Preferences
Preferences menu allows the user to enable/disable functions on the GUI and Control
Surface.
9.5.2 GUI Preferences

GUI Preferences are a set of options that are designed to help the user access or control
functions within the GUI more quickly and efficiently.
Menu Select Button - This menu allows the user the choice of two styles of menu navigation.
• Top is used when travelling between different menus using the GUI panel buttons the
system enters via the 'Top' menu, or front page of that 'menu tree'.
• Last is used when the GUI records the last menu the user was in before leaving that
menu tree.
Timecode Mode - this sets timecode increments to be set to the nearest Frame or Field.
Store Load On Press - this gives the option to load a still when pressing a minipic in the
Store menu, or by selecting “No”, allows the user to select a still but not actually load until the
{Load} button is pressed. This allows the user to clone the still selection by “Copy, Copy”
pressing a minipic and “Paste, Paste” the action onto a User Function button. The still will not
load into the selected Store until the User Function is pressed. The selected Still can also be
loaded into the selected Store by pressing {Load Selected Still} in the Shortcuts menu.
Sub-Clip Active On Press - this will load a sub-clip into a Store when touched in the Store -
Sub-clips menu.
Mouse Wheel Sensitivity - allows fine adjustment for the mouse wheel.

USB Keyboard Type - the user can now select between 22 different types of USB keyboard
preferences, US, UK, French, German, Spanish and Latin American etc. Use the parameter
control to scroll through the keyboard type options. This option is saved in the EEPROM of
the Panel and not in the Panel Config.
Tracking Preferences:
Menu Tracking - when the user selects a function on the control surface i.e. [CHROMA] in
the Key Control area and presses the button twice, with Menu Tracking turned On, the GUI
screen will switch to the Chroma Keyer menu. So as the function suggests, the GUI menus
will track a function selected on the control surface.
Store Tracking - When a Store is selected on the control surface, the Store menu will follow
the selected Store.
Layout Tracking - this allows button press actions on one M/E on the control surface to be
tracked on all other M/Es.
ME & Bus Tracking - any Key or M/E delegates selected on the control surface, M/E & Bus
Tracking causes the GUI Delegate buttons to follow.
Key-in-Transition Delegate Tracking - When active, a double-tap of any of the 'KEY1 - 4'
buttons on the control surface.
Xpt Button Tracking - this allows Xpt button tracking in the GUI menus.
Crosspoint Tracking - causes the menus that are crosspoint oriented to update their
crosspoint selector to track any crosspoint selections on the control surface.

9.5.3 Panel Preferences

Panel Preferences are a set of options that are designed to help the user access or control
functions on the Control Surface more quickly and efficiently.
Panel Preferences
Preset Bus Double Hit Shift - when turned On, if a Preset Bus button is pressed twice
quickly, the Preview monitor and mnemonic will display the source and name of the “shifted”
crosspoint. The panel will reflect this by either lighting the SHIFT ARROW and the XPT button
or just the SHIFT ARROW. This is determined by the user preference Shifted Crosspoint
Lit/Unlit.
Crosspoint Hold Return On/Off - this allows the user to hold down crosspoint button 'A' and
then additionally press button crosspoint button 'B'. Pressing 'B' will select that crosspoint until
'B' is released, at which point the crosspoint selection returns to that for 'A'
Shifted Crosspoint Buttons - This function when set to LIT, will light both the crosspoint
button and the {Shift} button of a shifted source. When set to UNLIT, the actual crosspoint
button for the shifted source will not be lit until the {Shift} button is pressed.
Lockable Crosspoint Shift - this will allow the locking of the shift function to display the
shifted Xpts continuously.
Buttons Show Tally Next - this is used in conjunction with the User Config - GPO Setup
and allows the tally function to show what is being tallied on.
Keyboard Brightness - this adjusts the brightness of all the buttons on the Kula control
surface.
Legend Brightness - this adjusts the brightness of the mnemonic displays on the Kula
control surface.
Graphic Button Brightness - this adjusts the brightness of the OLED user function buttons.
T-Bar Plate Brightness - adjusts the brightness of the T-bar plate.

Display Server Timeout - This causes the touch screen GUI to go into sleep mode after a
designated amount of time. Default is 2 hours, maximum On time is 4 hours, can also be
disabled so the GUI is on constantly.
Numeric Keypad Timeout - use the parameter control to adjust the numeric keypad timeout
in increments of 5 minutes, up to 30 minutes. When set to 0 the keypad will not timeout.
Background Bus - use the parameter control to step through Normal, Reversed and Follow
Tbar.
Key Delegate Tracking - links the Key 1 - 4 buttons in the Transition Control area on the
control surface to the Key 1 - 4 buttons in the Key Control area on the control surface.
Key-in-Transition Delegate Tracking - When active, a double-tap of any of the 'KEY1 - 4'
buttons on the control surface and the Layout Group will change delegate to follow the Key
bus just selected.
Panel Knob Reattachment - this function has 2 modes:
• Classic - the Key Control functions that work in conjunction with the Assignable Con-
trols will behave in the normal way.
• Safe - when using the Key Control functions in conjunction with the Assignable Con-
trols for Resize, Border, Mask and Bus Color, pressing the function button in the Key
Control area will make the button go Green, and the Assignable Controls will reflect
and adjust the selected function.
If a different function is selected, the previous function button used in the Key Control
area will remain Green, this allows the user to step back and forth between the
selected functions.
To switch the function off, press and hold the button, and the Green light will go off.

9.5.4 Colors
Button Colors
This menu allows the user to set user defines color schemes to specific buttons on the control
surface and changes color schemes for actions and alerts.
All of the buttons on the control surface can have their default color schemes changed in this
menu. The diagram above Shows an example of the Tally Now adjustment menu. touch one
of the items in the main menu and an adjustment menu will appear.
The default color can be changed by adjusting the Hue and Saturation parameters.
ME Bank Colors
This menu allows the user to set different color schemes for individual M/Es on the control
surface.
Adjusting the parameter control will change the color scheme on all the available M/Es.
Press the {Apply} button to apply the color scheme to the M/Es.

Other Colors
The Other Colors menu allows the user to change the preset color scheme of the Kula color
crosspoint buttons.
In the Crosspoint Mapping menu on the GUI, the user can select crosspoint in the table and
then use the Xpt Lamp Color parameter to set a preset color scheme for the selected
crosspoint.
The Other Colors menu allows the user to select and change the preset colors in the Color
list. Touch one of the colors and then use the Hue and Saturation parameters to adjust to the
desired color, then press the {Apply} button.
Center Joystick - this button will calibrate and center the Joystick axis.
Note: Do not offset the Joystick when pressing this button.

9.5.5 SnapShot
Project - allows the user to select which Project Snapshots are saved to.
Overwrite - will allow a Snapshot that is attached to a button to be overwritten or not.
9.5.6 Screen Coordinate System

The Screen Co-ordinate System is a tool by which the user can adjust the display of
co-ordinates on the GUI screen; co-ordinates that relate to the Resize engine, Mask areas
and Wipe positions.
Crop: The ability to set the crop positions into Screen Grid mode (as per Wipe/masks) to
allow the copying of Positions and Crops. To copy parameters “press and hold” the {Copy}
button on the GUI and select the parameter using the {Normal} button associated with that
parameter.
Multiple parameters can be copied while copy button is held down, next go to the parameters
you want to paste these values too, hold down {Paste} and press the {Normal} button
associated with that parameter. The default mode for the Crop grid is percent.
9.5.7 Macro Button Block

This changes the block of Macro buttons to having a “Page” functionality, with 7 pages
available to use.

The user can select a “Bus Group” B or C (for M/E2 or 3) depending on the number of control
surfaces. Then select page in the “Current Page” parameter, or when this function is enabled
in the Panel Preferences menu.
The user first needs to select the Bus Group for that panel and then set the page require for
that set of buttons. Each Bus Group Macro Button Block can either have all 8 buttons
assigned to the Selected Page, or the bottom L button can become a page selector button -
this is controlled using the “Has Button Page” selector. Holding the page button down, the
other 7 buttons now display the numbers 1 to 7. Pressing one of the buttons will select that
Block of buttons to that particular page.

9.6 Button Maps

In the Panel main menu, press the {Button Maps…} menu link button to enter the Panel
Config - Button Map Assignment menu.
In this menu, the mapping of the control panel buttons to the system's crosspoints can be
changed to suit a user's preference on a bank-by-bank or M/E by M/E basis. Button maps are
easy to setup and are the preferred way to setup crosspoints on a control surface.
The diagram above is the top menu, which Shows the Button Maps that are available in the
table at the top, and the M/E's, Banks and Aux panels present in the Bank or M/E Button
Maps boxes at the bottom. The way the button maps are setup will be described a little later in
this section.
A Bank Button Map is suitable should the setup of crosspoints and buttons need to remain
constant, irrespective of which M/E has been selected on that bank.
By selecting a M/E Button Map the map will track that M/E wherever it is selected on the
panel.
A Bank Button Map will take precedence over an M/E Button Map, should both be loaded
simultaneously.
Parameter Controls
Bus Group - this selects the ME Bank or Aux panel
Button Map - this selects the button-to-crosspoint map that can be loaded into the M/E, Bank
or Aux panel.
Menu Link Buttons

Edit - this is a menu link to the Edit Button Map menu, which is used to edit the current and/or
existing button maps. Select Edit and the Edit Button.
New - this is a menu link to the Panel Config - Edit Button Map menu, which is for setting up
a new button map.
• Delete - this deletes a button map file permanently from the disk.
• Load - will load a selected map into a M/E or attach it to a M/E Bank
• Unload - will unload a selected map from a M/E or a M/E Bank
Show Crosspoints - will change the mnemonic display on the control panel to show all
crosspoint positions. Using the Bus Group parameter control or by touching the appropriate
M/E in the attacher box select appropriate M/E, Bank or Aux. When happy with the selection
press the {Load Map} action button and the button map will be loaded. Press {Unload Map}
if a different button map is required.

9.6.1 Panel Config - Edit Button Map Menu

In this menu a user specific button map can be created and saved ready to be mapped to a
chosen M/E Bank or M/E. The menu can be used to Edit an existing button map or used to
create a New button map.
9.6.2 Edit a Button Map

To Edit a button map, first, select a Project and a File within the Project that is going to be
edited in the button map main menu.
While still in the main menu, press the {Edit...} button and the Edit Button Map menu will be
displayed (as shown below). Use the Button Number parameter to select the crosspoint and
then use the Crosspoint or Shifted Crosspoint parameters to alter and edit the button map.
When satisfied with the setup, press the {Save...} button to save the edited button map.
Button is the
physical button on
the control surface
Crosspoint is the
existing Xpt setup
The {Primary Enabled} and {Shift Enabled} buttons will enable or disable selected
crosspoints or shifted crosspoint in the button map table.
Parameter Controls
Button Number - selects the physical button on the Control Surface and M/E bank button
number/row in the table.
Crosspoint - changes the current crosspoint that is associated with the button on the M/E
bank.
Shifted Crosspoint - this will move (or shift) the crosspoint to a user-defined point in the
Button Map. When the shift button is pressed on the control surface the crosspoint will now be
displayed in its new position on the control surface and the button map.
Note: If some shifted Xpts are displayed in Red, this is because the Xpt is being used
somewhere else in the current button map.
If the save button is pressed, a dialog box will appear with options to continue or fix the
button map.

Button Type - this parameter will change the function of the currently selected button on the
control surface. The options are:
Normal
Shift Key
Xpt Lock Key
Menu Link Buttons
Show Crosspoint - will display the actual crosspoint number in the mnemonic display on the
control panel. The crosspoints will be displayed in their “unnamed” form, i.e. XPT1, XPT2,
XPT3 etc.
Clear To End - this will clear the button map of crosspoints and shifted crosspoints ready for
a new button map to be setup, starting from the current button and clearing to the bottom of
the table.
Copy & Next - when pressed this function will re-sequence the crosspoints in the default
order and move to the next crosspoint in the button map table.

9.6.3 New Button Map

To create a New Button Map is a similar process to editing an existing one. First, select a
Project and a File where the new button map is going to be saved.
While still in the main menu, press the {New...} button and the Edit Button Map menu will be
displayed.
Note: Notice that when the {New...} button map button is pressed that the Edit Button Map menu
is displayed.
Use the Crosspoint or Shifted Crosspoint parameters to alter the button map. When
satisfied with the setup, press the {Save...} button to save the edited button map.
The new button map will now be saved into the selected Project, 1000 button maps can be
saved into each Project.

9.6.4 Button Information

The Panel Config - Button Information main menu displays information about Clone button
functions and Macro buttons. The Button Summary table displays all the information related
to a selected button.
9.6.4.1 Button Summary
Button Name - the normal button function.
Clone Name - the clone function attached to a button.
Normal Button Function - displays if the normal button function is active.
Cloned Button Function - displays if the cloned button function is active.
Macro - displays if a macro is attached to the button
Button Delay - this displays the delays attached to a macro function
Bitmap From - display where a bitmap is derived from, when cloned to a User Function
button
Lamp From - displays lamp from cloned function or from the normal function
Snapshot Recording - inhibits the user function buttons ability to record a snapshot.
Cloning Permitted - if a function can be cloned, this parameter will display Yes
Live Mode Behavior - Shows “Enabled” if Live Mode can be set on this function.
Current Lamp Color - this displays the default or any user-defined lamp color that has been
applied to a button.

9.6.4.2 Button Functions
These buttons are used to locate and disable Clones or Macros associated to a button.
Live Mode - will turn Live Mode On or Off
Stop All Macros - will stop all macros running
Locate Button - this will allow the current function of any button to be summarized in the
table. Buttons with Clones and/or Macros attached will light Green when the Locate Button is
Active. To locate a button Press the “Locate Button”, it will go Red and the panel will only light
up Normal Button (e.g. Clones, Macros attachments and Button that have had their Normal
Functionality Disabled), the Table will then Display the current Information about that button.
The Locate button will then return to Gray.
Detach Snapshot - this will detach a Snapshot from the selected button
Locate Macro - works in the same way as Locate Clone, and locates a Macro function button
Detach Macro - detaches a macro function from a button
Locate Clone - locates the clone button by turning off all the lamps on all the buttons on the
control panel and GUI except the clone button which will turn Red.
Detach Clone - detaches the clone function from a button.
When a button is selected, this menu can be used to enable/disable functions listed below.
Active Functions
Clone - switches the clone function On/Off
Normal - switches the normal function of a button On/Off.
These can be selected together so that both functions are active.
Lamp From:
Clone - will set the button lamp to light up the same as the cloned function, i.e. if live to air the
button will turn Red.
Normal - switches the lamp between its normal Green color and the Red cloned color
Macro - this will allow a lamp to be lit from a macro assignment

Bitmap From
Clone - displays a bitmap from the cloned function
Macro/SS - by default, a User Function Button would be blank normally, however the button
can also have a bitmap from a macro or snap shot.
User - displays a bitmap from the User Function, Edit Button Bitmap menu.
Snapshot Save
Inhibited - inhibits the user function buttons ability to record a snapshot.
Allowed - allows a user function button to save a snapshot

9.7 Preview Aux

The Preview Aux function can be used to setup the MAV-AUX module that can be connected
to the Kula control surface. The Switched Source mnemonic emulates the Crosspoint or
Button Map setup on the MAV modules on the control surface.
The MAV-AUX modules are enhanced Aux Bus control modules that have three mnemonic
displays which give the operator three levels of information:
1. Aux Output Designation - allowing the user to rename the Aux output designation.
2. Current Source to the Aux Output
3. Crosspoint - crosspoint or button map driven sources
Aux Bus setup for Kula is done in the User Config - Aux Bus menu.
Using the MAV-AUX module is simple, select the required Aux bus using the top row of
buttons, then select the source for that Aux Bus using the bottom row of buttons.
The Aux Bus name can be assigned in the User Config - Aux Setup menu.
The Aux Bus Select buttons are numbered starting at 1 on the left of the panel and can have
any available Aux Bus assigned to them, using the Bus rotary control.

9.7.1 Preview Aux Parameter Controls

Bank - this selects an aux modules. The “Bank” that the aux module sits in is setup in the
Panel Config - MAV Layout menu.
Button - scrolls through the Aux Selection Buttons at the top of the MAV-Aux module.
Bus Type - this sets the Aux Buses 1 to 64
Bus - this allows the user to select the Aux Bus that will be displayed on that button and sets
the Aux Buses 1 to 64
Disable - disables the button leaving it blank and inactive.

9.8 MAV Layout

The MAV Layout menu displays the control surfaces individual components connected
together to make up the Kula control surface. These are fixed and should not be altered or the
control surfaces may not work correctly.
Note: When the system has booted up, if the control surface doesn’t light up as expected, touch
the {Kula Auto Config} button to make sure that the Kula control surfaces are configured
properly.
If an extra control surface is added to a 2M/E system, to make the system work as a 3M/E
system, once the 3rd control surface is added, touch the {Kula Auto Config} button and the
3 control surfaces will be configured correctly.
The other use for this menu is when MAV Modules such as the MAV-AUX module has been
added to the system and the user needs to configure the MAV module to work with an M/E
Group.
Use the MAV Selector parameter to scroll to the MAV module. Use the M/E Group parameter
to set the MAV Module into the correct M/E group. Finally touch the “{Apply Changes}”
button.

9.9 Crosspoints
The crosspoint mapping menu is where all the physical inputs to the mainframe and all the
internal sources are mapped to the Crosspoints using the crosspoint mapping table. The
crosspoint map has been setup in a factory default state, and functions like the Key and Fill
for coupling Stores, and the Mattes/Washes have all been setup. Which means less work for
the user.
Note: The user-defined Crosspoints can be setup in any way the User wishes.
The Fixed Crosspoint cannot be changed.
If the crosspoint map is going to be changed or modified, touch the attacher below the
crosspoint map table and a new set of parameter controls will appear on the GUI.
user-defined Crosspoints
Using the parameter controls, will allow any crosspoint to be re-mapped to any of the physical
inputs or the internal source, change the Key and Fill associations, setup the legend lamp for
the mnemonic displays on the control surface and re-name the crosspoints. Crosspoint Map
table has five columns, the columns left to right contain the crosspoint number, the name of
the crosspoint, the Fill and Key sources and the Split column.
Crosspoint - crosspoint 1 to 80 user-defined Crosspoints and 81 to 247 Fixed

Crosspoints. Use this parameter to scroll down the list of crosspoints.
Name - This column is for a crosspoint name that the user can set using the on-screen
keyboard. When giving a name to the crosspoint, up to 11 characters can be entered, the
characters font will vary in size and height depending on how many characters are typed in,
that means characters 11 maximum.
Enable - this function enables/disables the selected crosspoint. When disabled, the
crosspoint “Name” will display as “Disabled” and the panel mnemonic is left blank.
Split - this function is used when the user wants to use a Fill or a Key source to give you a key
signal for the Key Layer. Split to Fill/Key means that the setting on the crosspoint the user has
“Split”, will determine a Key signal for the Key Layer. When Fill is selected, the Fill signal of
the crosspoint is used for the Key signal of a Split Key. When Key is selected, the Key signal
of the crosspoint is used for the Key signal of a Split Key.

Fill Source / Name - This column is used to set the Fill Source, which is the signal that
provides the Fill when selected on a Key bus or provides the source for the background
buses.
Key Source / Name - This column selects the Key Source which provides the Key (hole cut)
signal when selected on a Key bus. It has no effect when selected on a background bus.
Xpt Lamp Color- This sets a color to the selected Xpt. There are a range of preset colors that
can be selected for a Xpt, using the Xpt Lamp Color parameter.
Note: More Xpt colors can selected in the Panel Config - Colors menu
{Name '???' & Next} - this button is a quick short cut. It puts '???' into the current Source
Name and then jumps on to the next Source in the list, forcing the switcher to take the Name
from the Source itself. This helps to make naming all sources quicker.
{Show Crosspoints} - this button when pressed will go Green. This will cause the mnemonic
display on the control panel to change and show the crosspoints in their “unnamed” form, i.e.
XPT1, XPT2, XPT3 etc. Press again to go back to the user specific crosspoint setup.
9.9.1 Key Drop
Note: For information about using Key Drop, please see the Configuration - Keyer chapter of
this manual.

9.9.2 Preset Trigger

Preset Trigger is a function which allows a Macro to be triggered whenever a particular
crosspoint is selected onto the output of an M/E, using a transition on the Transition Panel.
A Preroll Delay can be specified which will delay the actual transition for a specified duration
after the Macro has been triggered.
Note: The Macro will only be triggered by a transition made on the Transition area of the control
surface, i.e. Cut, Auto or a physical transition of the T-Bar. It will not be triggered by a cut
made directly on a bus row, i.e. “hot cutting” along the on-air bus.
The Preset Trigger menu is accessed from the Crosspoints menu. In the Crosspoints menu,
touch the {Preset Trigger…} button.
Firstly the operator needs to select the Xpt which will be used to trigger the Macro. This is
done either by touching the relevant Xpt in the top table, or by using the parameter top right of
the menu.

Next, use the “Project” parameter to select the project that contains the required macro. Then
use the “Macro” parameter to select the macro that will be triggered when the crosspoint is
selected by a transition.
Once all the parameters are selected in the above menu, touch the {Attach} button to attach
the macro to the crosspoint. The “Enables” options menu will appear, which will allow the user
to set which M/E and which Bgnd, Key the transitions will actually trigger the Macro.
By selecting Xpt 5, then selecting M/E2, Bgnd and Key 2 the Macro will be triggered
whenever a transition is made, which will bring “Xpt4” onto the output of “ME2” using a
transition on the Background or selecting Key 2.
Touch the top attacher to display the “Preroll” parameter. This parameter allows the user to
set a delay for the transition, as a predetermined time after the Macro has been triggered.

9.10 Aux Setup

In this menu, the exact setup for each individual Aux Bus can be adjusted. The center of the
menu screen Shows a table, which contains each Aux Bus details. The attacher boxes at the
bottom of the screen contain the individual parameters controls.
The Kula mainframe has freely assignable outputs; which means that any output can be
assigned to be either an M/E output, Aux output or a Multiviewer Head.
The table in the center of the menu displays the setup of the Aux Buses and the sources that
are assigned to them.
Sources for the aux buses can be M/E output Xpts, Store Xpts or any of the sources on the 80
Xpts.
9.10.1 Setup an Aux Bus

To setup an aux bus, use the Aux Bus parameter to select the required aux and the
Crosspoint parameter to select the source for the aux bus or use the pop-up list selector to
quickly select the required source. This will also set what goes on each of the available
outputs 1 to 18, as shown in the User Config - Aux Setup menu.

The Lock parameters are used to lock out specific functions on an Aux panel.
The Panel Lock, lock out the selected crosspoint assigned to the Aux Panel so that when the
button is pressed, the crosspoint does not operate.
File Lock stops the user from loading a file.
When a Macro is attached to a crosspoint, the Macro Lock parameter disables the crosspoint
so that the attached macro cannot be triggered to run.

9.11 Peripherals
The Peripherals menu is used to control various external equipment; such as VTR's, video
disks, routers etc.
Touch the {Peripherals} button on the GUI to enter the Peripherals main menu.
Note: Before using any of the Peripheral menus it is important to understand how the Protocols
are setup and assigned. See the next page.

9.11.1 Protocols
The Protocols menu is used to set parameters for bi-directional communication with external
devices. Either by one of the RJ45 - RS422 ports or selecting one of the IP protocol
connections.
Protocols have to be setup in this menu before the Peripherals functions can be used.
There are 5 Protocol Types (sets) to choose from; Tally & UMD, Router, Playout, Editor and
Miscellaneous. Each protocol type has a number of available sub-protocols to choose from,
that allow the users to connect to a large number of different types of external equipment.
9.11.2 How to Setup Protocols

Using the Loaded Protocol parameter, select a free row in the Loaded Protocols table.
Then use the Protocol Type parameter is used to scroll through the protocol sets.
Once the required Protocol Type has been selected, use the Available Protocol parameter
to scroll to the required protocol and then touch the {Load} button.

After the Load button was touched, the selected protocol is placed in the Loaded Protocols
table, touch the {Configure} button to enter the Protocol Config menu.
The user is able to select the type of connection between Kula and the external equipment
using the “Transport Type” parameter i.e. Serial or IP, and also set user defined parameters
for the protocol.
The Settings - Default as the name suggests is the default setup to communicate with an
external device (normally this would default to “RS422 Port”). If a specific setup is needed,
press the {User} button in the Settings parameter, the user is now able to setup the protocol
as required.
When the parameters have been set correctly press the {Apply} button. The menu will now
return to the main Protocols menu.

The {Activate} button will be yellow, if happy with the setup, touch the {Activate} button. The
protocol setup information is displayed on the right side of the menu.

9.12 Peripherals - Engineering
9.12.1 TSL UMD Output Only

This peripheral is used to control and send information displayed in the Under Monitor
Displays used in galleries and Multiviewers.
The protocol is connected to Kula by one of the RS422 ports.
Select the UMD address, then select the BNC output from the Kula mainframe, the user can
then select if they wish to display the output name from the Kula system to be displayed on
the under monitor display.
A tally is also displayed if the source to the under monitor display is on air.

9.12.2 TSL UMD In

This protocol allows Kula to receive source names from external devices (for example a
Router) Eng Config - Input Setup menu allows Kula to use the source names.
The protocol is setup in the Eng Config - Protocols menu, this will allow the Kula mainframe
to communicate with the external device. Kula is able to receive source name information
from the external device via the RS422/IP connection or the BNC, each source name is
mapped to a UMD address.
From the menu above, assume a source called VTR87 is mapped to UMD address 87 and it
is feeding Kula input 3, the name “VTR87” will overwrite the default name “BNC3”
Using the Router Overwrite parameter in the Eng Config - Input Setup menu, Kula is able
to receive UMD information from any of the BNC inputs. This information will then be
displayed in the input menu’s and can also be used for the mnemonic displays on the control
surface for selecting sources.

9.13 Peripherals - Router Control

This function allows Kula to control a third party router. The menus are similar in functionality
for the GVG7000 and Utah RCP-3A, and the menus for the Snell SW-P-08 through to the
Quartz Controller are also similar in functionality to each other.
In the following section one example form each Router Control function will be explained.
For this example, we are going to look at the SAM SW-P-08 Router Control Peripheral.
9.13.1 Snell SW-P-08 - Xpt
This menu enables the user to control the router Names.
When first connecting to a system controller, Kula will request all the names for the
Destinations, Sources and Levels.
The user can then assign names to the 12 destination buttons and 12 next source selection
buttons, the level names will then also appear in the Level Mapping by Names menu.

Router Control Buttons
Take - Sets a crosspoint
Protect - protects a destination
UnProtect - removes the destination protection
9.13.1.1 Salvo Control
This menu works in exactly the same way as the previous menu.
The Xpt button reverts back to the Xpt Control menu.

9.13.2 Utah RCP-3A

Touch the {Utah RCP-3A...} button, which will open the RCP-3A Status & Control menu.
If the Router is connected the sources and destinations will be displayed as shown in the
above menu.
To perform a take, select the Source and Destinations using the parameters, on the desired
level and then touch {Take}. The Green selection indicates which level is active - which level
the Takes and (un) Protects will be acted on. There can be multiple active levels selected at
an time.
Alternatively, select the {Quick Take...} button at the bottom of the menu, which will take the
user to the RCP-3A Quick Take menu as shown below.
To perform a take, select the Source and Destination on the desired level and then touch
{Take}. To lock the assignment press {Protect}. To Unlock press {UnProtect}.

9.14 Peripherals - Engineering Router Control

The menus in this section of the Peripherals menu are used to setup Kula to communicate
with external routers. One of the features that can be used with these menus is Kula’s new
Intelligent “Tile Line” concept (this will be described later in this section).
9.14.1 Router Config

This menu allows the user to make changes to the way routers work with Kula.
If for example a source switch on the external router is changing later than , the timing can be
adjusted. This will delay the cut on the to ensure the router switch is complete.
Adjust the Cut Delay until clean switching is achieved.
For routers that use the SAM SWP08 protocol the Fast Protocol selection can be enabled.
This sends out multiple commands per video field. It will depend on the implementation of
SWP08 whether this mode works.
Ext Rtr. Background:-
• Normal - will send Xpt Take requests and Source Name requests.
• Read Only - will stop Xpt Take requests but continue Source Name requests.
• Slow Read Only - will stop Xpt Take requests but continue Source Name requests.
• V.Slow - will send Xpt Take requests and Source Name requests at a very slow rate.
• V.Slow Read Only - will stop Xpt Take requests but continue Source Name requests
at a very slow rate.
• Off - will stop both Xpt Take and Source Name requests.

9.14.2 Router Connections

Here the physical router outputs (Including Matrix and Levels) can be mapped to the physical
Kula inputs.
Each of the input sources has to be setup individually, as each one is setup, touch the {Set}
button
Matrix - this is the router connected to Kula.
Level - this refers to the different levels within a router, video, audio and other.
Destination - this is the output from the router

9.14.3 External Router Control - Practical Application

Kula now has the mechanism to expand the number of sources coming into the mainframe
using an external router. This is primarily due to a system setup running in UHD. Using this
new feature, the number of sources to be used with the Kula, are expandable up to the size of
the upstream router.
9.14.3.1 Intelligent Tie Line Concept
Kula deploys an intelligent "Tie Line" approach, the desired external router outputs
(destinations) are connected to Kula inputs. These inputs on the Kula and destinations from
the Router are treated as "Tie Lines". Each Tie Line acts as a floating video bus between the
router and Kula, they are intelligently assigned and used as required.
Source selection on any Bus is transparent to the operator, regardless form where the Xpt is
being made, i.e. in the external router, or in the Kula itself.
The Kula software knows what physical inputs / Tie Lines are allocated and what are not
being used on a bus. Kula then assigns the Physical input /Tie Line to the desired Bus upon a
source selection. Kula updates the upstream router's destination /Tie Line with the selected
source.
Camera feeds Other External

to Router Router Sources to
Kula
Kula Mainframe
Tie Lines
Communications
Kula Control Surface
Source selection on any Bus is transparent to the operator. Once setup, the operator sets the
desired router source by selecting the appropriate router XPT on the required bus. The
selection on the external router and the Tie Line path into the Kula is automated.

9.14.3.2 How Many Tie Lines?
How many Kula inputs do you need to convert to Tie Lines? This is entirely dependent on a
few external factors, such as:
• How many inputs available on the Kula (max number shown below):
• HD = 40 Tie Lines
• UHD = 12 Tie Lines
• How many router destinations are available.
• How many router sources need to be selected on Kula at any one time.
For example:
If the user wants to select different external router sources on the A and B bus of ME2 this
would require 2 Tie Lines.
For HD this would require 2 router destinations and 2 Kula inputs.
For UHD this would require 8 router destinations and 8 Kula inputs.
If the user requires external router sources on the A and B bus plus Key 1 and Key 2, this
would require 4 Tie Lines.
In summary: Each different external router source selected simultaneously requires a Tie
Line. Kula
Each Tie Line requires one router destination and Kula input in HD, or 4 router destinations
and 4 Kula inputs in UHD.
Note: If at all possible, it is recommended that the user creates more Tie Lines than are actually
required. This gives some redundancy and reduces the risk of the system running out of
available Tie Lines
9.14.3.3 Setup
Protocol Setup
To setup the protocol, the user will have to go to the Eng Config - Protocols menu. Use the
"Protocol Type" parameter to select "Router", then, use the "Available Protocol" parameter
to select the required protocol. For this example, "SW-P-08 Router" is selected. Touch the
{Load} button to add the protocol to the "Loaded Protocols" table.

The user will now have to configure the protocol so that Kula can communicate with the
router. Touch the {Configure…} menu link button and the "Protocol Config" menu is
displayed. Use the "Transport Type" parameter to select the communications transport type,
then, setup the "IP Client Configuration" details.
Once setup, touch the {Apply} button.

Then back in the Peripherals main menu, touch the {Activate} button to activate the protocol.
Peripherals Setup
Touch the {PERIPH} button to enter the "Peripherals" menu. Then touch the {Router
Connections…} menu link button.

Then select "Router Connections". Here the physical router outputs (Including Matrix and
Levels) need to be mapped to the physical Kula inputs. These connections will form the "Tie
Lines"
After each router connection row is set, touch the {Set} button.
Setting Up Names and Tie Lines
Next, go to the ENG Config - Input Setup menu.

In this menu, select the BNCs that where set to connect to the router destinations in the
"Peripherals - Router Connections" menu and use the “Router Tie Line” parameter set the
Tie Lines to "Yes". Do this for all the inputs that will become Tie Lines from the router.
Note: For inputs that are set as "Tie Lines", it is recommended that the "Source Standard"
parameter (in the Eng Config - Inputs menu) is set to "Auto Standard".
Note: It's recommended that sources which are off standard (and therefore requires format
conversion) do not come via Tie Lines if hot cutting is required.
Make sure at this point to "Overwrite" or "Save" the ENG Config setup.

Setting up the User Config - Crosspoint Mapping - External Router configuration
In the Crosspoint Mapping menu, touch the {External Router…} menu link button.
In the "External Router" menu, select free Xpts that are not being currently used, there are a
total of 160 variable Xpts available. Each external router source required on the Kula will need
its own router Xpt.
Use the "Crosspoint" parameter to select the required "Xpt" and then touch the "Fill Source"
attacher to enable the parameters and set the "External" parameter to "On"
Touch the attacher below the "Fill Source" attacher, then use the parameter controls to set
the "Matrix, Level and Source" for the selected XPT (originally set in the "Peripherals -
Router Connections" menu).

If the source is UHD set the "UHD" parameter to "Yes".
Note: When in UHD mode the 4 quadrants or streams from the router have to be consecutive.
If the router has its sources and destinations ganged as UHD then set "UHD Router" = Yes.
This differentiates between the control protocol setting 4 router XPTs (un-ganged) or just the
first router XPT (ganged).
"Name From" - Router means the name is fed into the Kula from the external router (should
the protocol allow this).
"Name From" - Crosspoint uses the internal XPT name as set in the User Config -
Crosspoint - Name menu.
Repeat the above for the "Key Source" for the Xpt if required. Otherwise it's recommended to
set the Key source to black or white for the external router XPT.
Make sure at this point to "Overwrite" or "Save" the User Config.

9.14.3.4 Operation
The Router XPTs can be mapped to the buttons on the control panel as per normal using the
Panel Config - Button Maps menu.
The operator just selects the router XPT as per any other source and its fed via the Tie Lines
from the external router.
If too many router sources are selected for the Tie Lines available, the following red text
warning is displayed above the table (top left):
Insufficient
Router Tie Lines
In this instance either extra Tie Lines need to be added, or router XPTs deselected from
buses if not required.
9.14.3.5 Timing
If the source switch on the external router is changing later than Kula, the timing can be
adjusted. This will delay the cut on the Kula to ensure the router switch is complete.
Peripherals - Router Control - Router Config
Adjust the Cut Delay until clean switching is achieved.
For routers that use the “SAM SWP08” protocol the Fast Protocol selection can be enabled.
This sends out multiple commands per video field. It will depend on the implementation of
SWP08 whether this mode works.

9.15 Peripherals - User
9.15.1 Tally Control

This menu allows the setup of a Tally serial port that is connected to an external devices. Tally
protocol supports 128 Source IDs.
Slot - selects the protocol that is currently being used
Extension Enable - this enables the SAM extension in the protocol
ID - 1-84 are for BNC inputs and 85-128 are fixed, therefore greyed out.
Source - is the 120 BNC inputs, 84 Source IDs are not enough. So the users have to
“choose” which 84 out of the 120 BNCs they want to tally.
Any BNC that has not been assigned, an ID will not be tallied.
Default Source IDs button will reset the mapping table to be one to one mapped, i.e. ID 1 is
BNC 1, ID 2 is BNC 2 etc.

9.15.2 VTR Control

This menu will allow control of VTR's connected via the RS422 ports.
Select the device using the “Slot” parameter. The status of the connection will be displayed in
the “Machine Status” parameter. Use the standard controls to Play, Fast Forward/Rewind,
Cue or Record the material on the device.
When in Edit Mode Cue points can be set up, which can be controlled directly from this menu
or can be saved to a button on the panel as a macro.
When selecting Edit Mode the Edit Cue Point will stop and you can manually adjust the
Timecode to reach a particular frame. Pressing Learn will record that as a Cue point and add
it to the list. Turn off Edit Mode until you are ready to Recall this point.
To Recall a Cue point, select it in the list and press Edit Mode and press {Recall}. You will
notice the VTR will now scroll to that Timecode and wait for further instruction.
Cue Register will scroll through your list of recorded Cue Points.
{VITC} - Vertical Interval Time Code

VITC assigns a specific time in hours, minutes, and seconds to each vertical blanking interval
in a video recording, along with a frame number. The time code can be used to start a
recording at a certain chronological time (such as 5:00:00 p.m.), or it can be used to keep a
playback machine synchronized with a master time source. The former application might be
used by a home television viewer, while the latter application would more likely be used by a
broadcaster.
{LTC} - Longitudinal Time Code

LTC is recorded along the length of the tape in the form of a modulated audio signal. The
signal may be recorded on a spare audio channel or, in the case of professional equipment,
on an “address track” available for just this purpose.
{NDF} - Non-Drop-Frame Format
{DF} - Drop-Frame Format
The difference between the two is that with Drop-Frame format the frame address is
periodically adjusted (once every minute) so that it exactly matches real time (at the 10
minute mark), while with Non-Drop-Frame format the frame address is never adjusted and
gets progressively further away from real time.

VTR Ganging - this allows the ability to “GANG” Roll up to 4 VTRs.
The Jog Enable function can be assigned to the Joystick on the control surface.
This can be permanently assigned to the joystick by pressing and holding of the [MEM]
button, either on the Joystick. With the MEM enabled the Joystick will return to the VTR Jog
Shuttle.

9.15.3 User Protocol

This function will allow the user to type in an ASCII or Hex command/message and send it out
to a serial port.
Slot - selects the serial port that will be used to send the commands
Index - the index number in the table for the selected command
Input Mode - selects between ASCII or HEX as a command form.
Command - command code written by the user. When in ASCII mode, Kula can be made to
also send out two special characters.
To send a carriage return character type “<cr>” and “<lf>” for a line feed character
Length - command length
Name - name (function) given to the command data.

9.15.4 Editor Control

This function allows external equipment software to control some functionality on Kula, such
as the Crosspoint selection, DMEM's, GMEM's, Transition Control.
Before using this protocol the required DMEM/GMEM's that are going to be used with the
external equipment software should have been saved into the “Default” Project on the Kula
mainframe. This will enable external equipment software to recall the required DMEM's and
GMEM's.
Note: This example the Sony BVS/DVS protocol will be used.
Set the Snapshot Project parameter to “Default”, this enables the external equipment
software to recall the required DMEM's and GMEM's.
The Snapshot Recall parameter should be set to “Auto” allowing the external equipment
software to recall DMEM's or GMEM's, but the user can also set the parameter to only allow
DMEM's or GMEM's to be selected.

9.15.4.1 Crosspoint Selection
Note: Sony BVS/DVS editor protocol directly drives linked M/E parameters for Bus Control and
Transition Control.
The Map ME parameter allows the user to offset the Logical M/E with the Editor ME, so for
example the “PP” (Program/Preview) can be set to any of the available Logical ME's.
Crosspoints can be selected to the following buses for each M/E (PP, M/E2, SME1 and
SME2) in the User Config - Crosspoint Mapping menu.
• BKGD A
• BKGD B
• KEY 1 FILL
• KEY 1 KEY
• KEY 3 FILL (PP and M/E2 only)
• KEY 3 KEY (PP and M/E2 only)
• KEY 4 FILL (PP and M/E2 only)
• KEY 4 KEY (PP and M/E2 only)
• KEY 2 FILL
• KEY 2 KEY
Crosspoint selection for Auxes
Crosspoints can be selected to be used with the Aux busses.

9.15.4.2 Transition Control
The following can be included in a transition:
• Transition mode - can include background, Key1, Key2, Key3 and Key4 in the transi-
tion
• Transition Types - includes MIX, WIPE, NAM and MATTE MIX
• Auto Transition Start
• Transition rate
• Transition Preview
• Transition Key On/Off

9.15.4.3 Key Control
The following can be selected to affect Key1, Key2, Key3 and Key 4 for each ME
Matte Fill On/Off
• Key Source Select - Auto (Coupled), Split and Self
• Mask Source Select - Util Mask 1 & 2, Preset Mask
• Key Type - Full, Linear, Luma and Chroma
• Key Edge Modify - Border
• Key Invert
• Key Mask
• Key Over (Layer) - Key1 only

9.15.4.4 Wipe Pattern Generator
Wipe patterns can be selected for transitions and these are mapped to software using either
the None, Sony or SMPTE numbering maps.
Also included for control:
• Wipe Repeats
• Wipe Direction - Reverse, Flip Flop
• Wipe H Modulation (On/Off)
• Wipe V Modulation (On/Off)
• Wipe Aspect (On/Off)
• Wipe Border (On/Off)
• Wipe Softness (On/Off) (softness set to 50%)

9.15.4.5 Snapshot
Snapshot Recall - Loads a Kula DMEM or GMEM (1 ~ 255 in the Default Project) from
specified Snapshot Project.
Snapshot Project - selects the project that contains the snapshot

9.15.5 RollCall Control

This function allows external equipment running RollCall control software to control certain
function on Kula.
Only one instance of the RollCall Control protocol can be loaded at any one time. This
instance of the protocol is system wide, facilitating control of all the available switchers on the
mainframe.
RollCall software will need to be installed onto a computer/laptop which is connected either
directly to one of the network ports on the Kula mainframe or to a network switch that is
connected to the Kula mainframe.
The “Yes/No” parameters allow the user to filter incoming RollCall messages to affect certain
areas of Kula.
Touch the {Editor Enable} button to enable the protocol, then select which RollCall message
is enabled.
The RollCall software is able to control the functions listed above, but with the crosspoint
control, the RollCall software is able to control both internal crosspoints in the Kula mainframe
and allow crosspoints to be controlled via an external control panel.

9.15.6 P-Bus Setup

This menu allows the control of Peripheral Bus Interface Boxes that can be connected to the
serial ports on the Kula mainframe. The P Bus boxes have various external devices
connected to them such as VTRs, cameras etc. The P-Bus boxes when “daisy chained” allow
more than one device to be controlled through one serial ports on the Kula mainframe, this
allows up to 24 P Bus boxes to be controlled.
Register - is a store for the setup and position of the P Bus device, 4096 registers are
available. For example, the start point on a VTR tape can be set in a register by selecting a
register number at a certain point relating to the time code then pressing the {Learn} button.
{Recall} will wind the tape back to the start point again which relates to the register point.
Trigger Type - this is a selection of devices that are pre loaded on to the mainframe hard
drive with the trigger functions setup ready to use, the trigger settings for each device are
displayed in the Triggers matrix in the menu. Scroll through this parameter and observe that
the triggers will change for each device selected.
Trigger - selects one of the 16 trigger options in the Triggers matrix
Button Controls
Device Selection - Touch one of the 24 (0 to 23) available Device Selection buttons to control
up to 24.
Learn - will learn an action from an external device and set the action to a register point
Recall - will recall the “Learned” action to the selected register point
Trigger - the Trigger facility allows the switcher to be used to control various functions of the
connected device such as Play, Stop, Slo-Mo or Reverse Play.

9.15.7 As Router Control

This section details the protocol for controlling Kula Switcher as routers. It covers the protocol
used to Change the Source Destination
Matrix - Defines which M/E to retrieve source names (Router Control systems can contain a
multiple of Matrix configurations).
Destination - Physical outputs associated with currently selected router matrix.
Bus - selects the source on the currently selected ME Matrix
Lock - this button locks the currently selected bus
Lock All - will lock all the buses displayed in the table for the currently selected ME matrix
only.

9.16 Shotoku Robotics

This function allows Kula to communicate with and control a Shotoku robotic camera heads
using an IP Server protocol.
9.16.1 Using the Shotoku Robotic Peripheral Controls

This function is used to control Shotoku Robotic Camera Heads.
On the MAV-GUI, in the “Home” menu, touch the {Peripherals} menu link button, then in the
Peripherals menu, touch the {Shotoku Robotics} menu link button.
9.16.2 Shotoku Camera Control

The opening menu will display that the Shotoku Robotics protocol is active (as shown below).
The 32 buttons in the top half of the menu are control buttons, they display the current
cameras that are on-line (when active, they will light up). They can be used along with the
“Command” parameter to Select, Detach and Grab cameras. The user can select a device by
touching one of the Camera Control Buttons, making sure that the correct parameter controls
is selected for the type of device, i.e. Pan, Tilt and Zoom.
Note: Each control button can have a number of commands and attachments, so the cloning of
camera control buttons is recommended.

Pan, Tilt and Zoom - move the camera as described, as soon as the attachers is touched the
selected parameters can now be attached to the control surface joystick (if available).
Height - adjusts the height of the camera pedestal
X, Y and Focus - work in the same way as the parameters above and are selected by
touching the attachers, and selecting X, Y & Focus.
Command - makes the number button select that camera for controlling. Detach makes the
number button deselect that camera.
Default Shot Time - The default time entered for camera shot storage control.

Camera Status Menu Link Button
The menu displays the camera head connection status, when connected to either the Kula
system or the Shotoku Robotic camera head control panel.
ID - this displays the number of Robotic Camera heads that are connected and can be
controlled,
Selected - this displays if the Robotic Camera heads are selected and active
Controller - this displays a unique number for the controlling device, for example, the
Shotoku Control panel could be Controller ID 1, and Kula could be Controller ID 2 depending
which Kula ID value is entered by the user.
Local - this indicates if the camera head is currently under local control.
Move Type - this shows the 'shot type' of the current move. This will only display something
during the shot recall.
Time To Shot - if a camera head has got a preset position setup in one of the Registers
(shown later), this is the time that the camera head would take to move into that preset
position.

Settings Menu Link Button
ID - A unique ID set as the controlling device, when online this field will be greyed out.
The user can manually select which camera head they wish to use by touching one of the 32
available buttons.
Note: The camera head can only be selected if it is deselected on the Shotoku controller.

9.16.3 Camera - Shots Menu

This menu allows the user to store {Store Shot} up to 100 recorded robotic camera head
positions into registers, and recall them {Recall Shot} at any time.
Store Shot
registers
Using the Store Shot
To use this function, the user will have to go back to the Camera Control Menu and touch
either the Pan, Tilt, Zoom or X, Y, Focus attacher (depending on the type of camera head
used) then press and hold down one of the 4 {MEM} buttons located next to the joystick. This
will allow the user to move the camera head using the joystick whilst in the Camera Shots
menu.
Go back into the Camera Shots menu, select a camera head by pressing one of the available
buttons (in the top half of the menu), the button will turn Green when selected. Next use the
joystick to position the camera head, select a register position in the table, and then press the
{Store Shot} button.
The stored position can be recalled by scrolling to the required “Shot” and pressing the
{Recall Shot} button.
Store Shot Table
The table displays the Name of the Shot (this can be altered using the Name attacher below
the table), the Description (again, this can be given a name using the Description attacher
below the table), Camera ID, this is the selected camera head when the Shot was saved and
Time To Shot is the time that the camera head takes to move from its current position to its
saved position in the selected register.
Touch the Name attacher twice and the on-screen Keyboard will appear, allowing the user to
enter a new name for the stored shot.
Touch the Description attacher twice to enter a description for the stored shot.

Register - Scrolls through the table.
Name - the name of the Shot.
Camera - will select one of the available camera heads, use either the parameter control or
press one of the buttons in the menu.
Time To Shot - this changes the time that the camera head moves from its current position to
its saved Store Shot position.
Shot Type - this controls the way the recorded shots are recalled by the system. Swoop, Cut
and Fade.

9.17 Peripherals - Others
9.17.1 VDCP Control

VDCP is a common protocol for video servers. Note that only some commands (which means
also functions) are mandatory; many are optional. If optional commands are not implemented
in the disk server, VDCP Simple should be selected instead.
A video server is a system that has hard disk storage for video, and one or more audio/video
channel connected to it. A channel on a server can play or record or both. The number of
channels on the server, and what capabilities they have, are server dependent.
9.17.1.1 Playout
Press the {VDCP Control…} menu link button, this option is used to control video disk
servers. Enter the Playout.
Parameter Controls
Slot - selects the slot that was setup in the Protocols menu
New Channel - selects a channel on the server
Select File - selects a clip by name
Edit
In Point - displays the play out start position of the selected clip
Out Point - displays play out end position of the selected clip
Play Rate - will allow the user to speed up or slow down a clip and change the direction of
play
{Mark In Point} - used to set a play out start point within a clip
{Mark Out Point} - used to set a play out end point within a clip
{NDF} - Non-Drop-Frame format
{DF} - Drop-Frame format

gets progressively further away from real time.
File List Attacher Controls
Channel - displays the selected channel on the server.
No of Files - displays the number of files in the File List
Free Space - displays the Free Space left on the Video Servers Hard Disk
Select File - allows the user select a file and to also rename a file
Length - displays the duration of the selected clip
File Name Length - allows the user to input file names greater than 8 characters by selecting
Variable
{Set Channel} - action button once the Channel has been selected. Note that if the channel
selected is not available on the server, or the access has been denied (normally because
some other device is currently using this channel), the Channel will be set to 0 after the button
is pressed.
{Refresh File List} - refreshes the file list after clips have been deleted or added.
Using this menu
Select a clip and touch {Play} to start back-to-back play out. The attacher
shows which clip is playing or about to play and its current timecode. While a clip is playing,
Play Rate parameter can be used to change the play speed and direction.
Using the Port parameter select the port the Video Disk system is connected to. This will then
be displayed in the Configure Channel attacher, then select the channel number on the server
and press the {Set Channel} button. Any stored clips will then be displayed in the File List.
Using the Select File parameter, select the required clip. The total length of the clip will be
displayed below the File List table, here the clip can also be re-named or deleted. The user
can choose to play a whole clip or just a part of it by setting a play out start or/and play out
end position(s).
The Current Clip box will display the name of the current clip being played or about to be
played.

9.17.2 VDCP Ganged Commands

Ganged Commands - this allows for VDCP devices to be gang rolled or cued. Press the
{Gang Commands} button, notice that a new option has appeared in the menu next to the
Transport Control buttons, this option displays the available Gang VDCP Ports. There are 4
Gang Ports available.
9.17.2.1 Transport Control
Play - will play a clip backwards and play forwards at standard speed
Slow - will play a clip backwards and forwards at slow motion speed
Stop - stops a clip
Fast reverse and fast forward
Pause a clip
Steps a clip forward and backward by one frame

9.17.2.2 Record
This menu will allow video/audio material to be recorded to the video disk system. The user
needs to give the new clip a name and record duration and then press the Record action
button.
The new name can not duplicate any existing ones and all names are case sensitive.
Record Attacher
Capacity - displays the server hard disk capacity
Name - put in the name of the clip that is going to be recorded

Variable in the File Name Length parameter allows names longer that 8 characters)
Duration - displays the record duration.
Start Position - sets the start position timecode, for the start of the record process
Timecode - displays time code as the clip is being recorded
Transport Control
Record - starts recording
Stop - stops the recording process

9.17.3 AVSP Control

Advanced Video Server Protocol, It allows the running, recording and editing of clips from up
to 6 channels with either EVS XT or EVS XT2.
The protocol is connected via a Serial Port, one serial port will support the use of 6 channels
of EVS, either in Playback or Record modes.
9.17.3.1 Play
The box in the top middle will display the number of configured EVS channels and their
relevant details, these channels are displayed as “Rec” or “Play”.
Center Top Buttons - (Channel Selector Area) - which channel of EVS is being controlled.
Slot - this displays the serial port that is connected to the server.
Standard - this has to be set to the video standard being used by the server.
Name - the Clip Name
Server Info
Data regarding the server being used which includes:
Standard - the Video Standard of and number of Clips stored on the server
Clip Num - the number of the clip being played
Free Size - the remaining Free Storage Space,
Clip Info - data regarding the name of the chosen clip, total clip duration and In/Out points.
Transport Control - generic play controls affecting the selected clip includes PLAY Fwd,
PLAY Rev, Play ½ speed fwd, rev, Pause.
Note: It is advisable to {Pause} when the clip is needed again because Stop will stop the clip from
running, and has essentially emptied the contents of that channel, it is then necessary to
Load and Cue the next clip. This will set the new clip to the marked In point.

Edit In / Out Points - the currently stored In and Out points for the currently loaded clip.
Using the attachers and Snap/Normal buttons it is possible to scroll through the clip to
re-assign a new In or Out point.
Note: Pressing and holding the Snap Normal button on the GUI brings up the internal popup
number pad, for the inserting of Time Code
Length - total duration of the currently loaded clip
Timecode - current Timecode of loaded clip
Play Rate - controls the playback speed of the clip
Save In/Out - saving the In and Out points will save to the server. Editing a clip and re-saving
will overwrite the original In/Out points. The action will be validated then Save - this ensures
that a clip will always start on field 0 when using Interlaced standards, it is a requirement of
the EVS that a clip begin on field 0 and end on field 1.

9.17.3.2 MOD
The Play Rate parameter in this menu means that it is possible to Modulate the play rate.
Modulators can be attached to this parameters in the usual fashion.
9.17.3.3 RECORD
Recording will create a stream of footage within the selected server, additional recordings are
appended onto the end of the stream.
Ensure the “Rec” channel(s) is selecting a video source that is running in the same video
standard as the server, it may be useful to route this source and the record channel to a
monitor, to be certain that pictures are actually being recorded. The EVS can be set to record
from ME Opt's or directly from external sources.

9.17.3.4 Start Recording
Select the correct “Rec” channel from the top section, then give the Clip a name (it is
advisable to give the recorded clip a name as the EVS generates a random number that is not
easily remembered), press the {Rec} button, record until satisfied, then Stop
Finally press {Create Clip} and the Clip will be saved to the server and appear in the Clip List
Now it is possible to go back to the Play menu and Edit the In and Out points of the newly
recorded clip.
Delete Clip - will delete the recorded clip

9.17.4 Odetics Control

Odetics protocol is a serial based protocol, that will allow Kula to control external equipment
such as disk servers.
9.17.4.1 Using Odetics Control
Controls and Parameters
Slot - selects the serial port that is connected to the external equipment
Select File - selects a file by name
Loop Count - when a file is set to play, if the {Loop} button is touched, the Loop Count
parameter can be set to play the file; Forever or from 1 time up to 100 times then stop.
Mark In / Out Points - the currently stored In and Out points for the currently loaded clip.
Using the attachers and Snap/Normal buttons it is possible to scroll through the clip to
re-assign a new In or Out point.
{NDF} - Non-Drop-Frame format
{DF} - Drop-Frame format
gets progressively further away from real time
File List - this table displays all available files external tape or equipment
No of Files - total number of files in the File List
Free Space - displays the free space left on the external equipment disk
Select File - allows the user to select a file from the File List
Refresh File List - refreshes the file list after file had been deleted or added.

9.17.5 AMP Control

AMP protocol is an IP Based control structure, it will support 4 channels (VTR1, VTR2, VTR3,
& VTR4) in a single device, and also supports multiple devices over different IP Addresses.
Note: Name the device as required e.g. Server1, this name will appear wherever the user needs
to select it.
Note: If the server is not on a local network, an IP Gateway will be required.
9.17.5.1 Using AMP Control
Kula can manage Folder (Bin) selection; set In and Out points, as well as the Standard VTR
type commands. It is recommended that Macros and/or Clones are used to assign these
controls to the main control surface.
The Peripherals - AMP File List menu allows the user to set the VTR that is being controlled
(green button at the top of the menu) and setup the working Folder Name and Clip Name lists.
Note: Each VTR can be set to contain different Folders/Clips.
The Clip Name table displays all the clips in the current working folder on the server.
{Refresh} button will refresh the Folder and Clip tables (e.g. if another controller adds a new
Folder/Clip).
Note: Kula uses the Folder Name and Clip Name for reference.
{Load & Cue Clip} button will load and cue the currently selected clip to the currently
selected VTR.

9.17.5.2 AMP Play/Edit Clip
The Play/Edit Clip menu allows the user to set In/Out points for the currently selected VTR
and clip, setting the In/Out points can be done either by using the VTR command buttons to
position the clip then press the {Mark In} or {Mark Out} buttons, or by direct input using the In
and Out parameter controls.
To assert the In/Out points, press the {Load & Cue Clip button}. To make a Macro that will
Cue a clip and assert In and Out points, set the Clip as described above, once happy with the
Clip, including its In/Out points, press [MACRO REC] button on the GUI.
Next, press {Load & Cue Clip} button, then press [MACRO REC] to stop recording the
macro.
The macro will now Load and Cue the selected Clip in the Macro main menu. View the macro
and notice that it has stored the Clip Name and In/Out Points.
9.17.5.3 AMP Record
Kula can also be used to set-up the Record VTR (Channel).
The record VTR/channel is set on the K2 server. To set the Clip Name, and Timecode press
the {Record Cue} button.

9.17.6 Nexio Server - AMP Protocol

Nexio Server is an Ingest and playback server supporting SD, HD and 1080p formats. Kula is
able to communicate with Nexio via the AMP protocol over RS422 or IP Client transport
types.
9.17.6.1 Nexio Play Menu
The Nexio Play menu allows the user to select files in the playout File List, set In/Out points
for the currently selected file, setting the In/Out points can be done either by using the VTR
command buttons to position the clip then press the {Mark In} or {Mark Out} buttons, or by
direct input using the In and Out parameter controls.
Once the protocol is activated, Kula will automatically download the file list from the Nexio
server. Touching the title bar of the File List will sort the files by Server, by Name, or by Date.
(By Server means it is in the order that the Nexio server sends to Kula).
Control Channel is the channel for the transport commands to the Nexio server (play, stop,
pause etc.). The control channel will initially set to the highest channel number for the server
(i.e if it is a 4 channel server, it will set to 4 at start). If the user needs to change the control
channel, change it before pressing {Load & Cue}.
The Sync Channel is the channel that follows the control channel i.e. if Sync Channel 1 is the
Fill channel and Sync Channel 2 is Key channel, the user can set Control Channel for the
transport commands to 1 and Sync Channel to 1&2, so the Key channel will always follow the
Fill. channel.
If there is no need to edit the In/Out points, Kula will use the first/last frame of the clip as the
In/Out points; if the user needs to trim the clip, set the In/Out points then press {Load & Cue}.

Note: It is recommended to setup the loop play parameters before doing a {Load & Cue}.
Select a file in the File List, press the {Load & Cue} button and the file will show in the
“Loaded File” window. User the In Point and Out Point parameters to set the Mark In/Out
points as required.
Select the transport command Control Channel, and then select the Sync and then press the
Play button.
Touch the “Playout” attacher at the bottom of the menu, here the Play Rate parameter can be
adjusted and the file set to “Loop” a set amount of times or forever if required.
The Playout Yes/No indicates what the control channel is capable of doing, i.e. if you have
selected a control channel that is a Record Only channel, it will have Playout No in the
window, then none of the playout transports will work
To jump to a particular frame in a file, set the Timecode to the frame and press {Play}.

9.17.7 Nexio Record Menu
Select the correct Control and Sync Channels, then give the file a name for playout
identification. Set the record In Point and Out Point and then press the {Record Cue}
button.
Once happy with the settings press the {Rec} button and recording will commence.

9.17.8 Audio Mixer

With the release of V1.3 software, Kula is now able to control functionality on a Yamaha
(01V96) Audio Mixing desk. Some of the functionality includes:
• Map MAV Audio Module faders to correspond with the Yamaha Mixer Faders.
• From MAV Audio Module:- Turn Audio On/Off per channel/Audio Fader off (unas-
signed).
• Channel Fader position set/modified from start point.
• Allow Yamaha panel override of Audio Faders separately from MAV Audio Module.
• Transition to Air Time & Delay.
• For Audio Follow Video, Audio Channel assigned to Mixer Input and set/learn levels
on source selection.
• Audio Follow Video Override.
9.17.8.1 What is Required
• Kula KPP Control Surface or 1M/E Control Surface/1M/E 19" Control Surface.
• Kula mainframe
• Touch screen monitor
• Yamaha Audio Mixer from list above (we tested the 01V96)
• KissBox CM-MIDI - MIDI transceiver for RTP-MIDI networks (this is the one that we
have tested. Other makes may be compatible).
• Ethernet cable from Kula Mainframe to KissBox
• 2x MIDI to MIDI cables (from KissBox to audio mixing desk)
• Laptop/desktop computer (initial setup of KissBox IP address)
Connection Diagram

Note: Before connecting the hardware (as shown above), the KissBox IP address has to be set
so that the Kula mainframe can communicate with it. The following section will describe
how this is done.
9.17.8.2 KissBox Setup
The KissBox editor software which comes with the product has to be installed on the
laptop/PC being used to set the IP address. Install the “KissBox_Editor_Win_11_0_0”.
Unplug the laptop/PC from any network being used (this is to stop any network IP address
conflicts).
Configure the laptop/PC so that it is on the same network as the KissBox, as shown below.
Click on “OK”. The network settings can be found in the “Control Panel\Network and
Internet\Network and Sharing Center\Local Area Connection\Properties\Internet protocol
Version 4(TCP/IPv4)”
Start up the KissBox Editor software, then in the “Add KissBox manually” area of the KissBox
Editor menu, type in the IP address of the KissBox and click on “Add Box”. The menu will now
look like the one below:

Change the IP setting in the “Network Configuration area of the menu to match the required
IP network and click on “Upload”. Then re-start the KissBox.
Change the laptop/PC network configuration back to the required network. Type the new
KissBox IP address into the “Add KissBox manually” area of the menu, then click on “Add
Box”. You will now see the updated network configuration.
9.17.8.3 Setup the Yamaha (this example 01V96i) Audio Mixer to communicate with the KissBox
From the MIDI connectors on the back of the back of the KissBox, connect a MIDI cable from
the “MIDI IN” port on the KissBox from the “MIDI OUT” on the Yamaha mixer. Connect a MIDI
cable from the “MIDI OUT” port on the KissBox from the “MIDI IN” on the Yamaha mixer, (as
shown in the diagram on page 1).
Power up the Yamaha audio mixer, then using the LCD screen on the Yamaha mixer,
navigate to the “DISPLAY ACCESS - DIO/SETUP - MIDI HOST” menu and select “MIDI” for
both the “Rx Port” and the Tx PORT”.
Next, go to the “DISPLAY ACCESS - MIDI - SETUP” and set:

CHANNEL - Tx to 1 and Rx to 1
PARAMETER CHANGE - Tx to ON and Rx to ON
Fader Resolution: HIGH
All other options need to be set to OFF.

9.17.8.4 Protocol Setup
On the Kula GUI, touch the “arrow up” button to get to the “Top” menu. Touch the {Defaults…}
menu link button. In the “Defaults” menu, touch the {Engineering Config…} menu link button.
The menu now displayed is the “Engineering - Config” menu. At the bottom of the menu,
touch the {Protocols…} menu link button.
In the “Protocols” menu, use the “Protocol Type” parameter to scroll down to the
“Miscellaneous” option. User the “Available Protocol” parameter to select “Yamaha”, select a
free slot in the “Loaded Protocols” table and touch the {Load} button.
Next, touch the {Configure…} menu link button to enter the “Protocol Config” menu.
Use the “Transport Type” parameter to select “IP Client” and make sure that the “IP Port
Number” is set to 5004. “Channel” is set to “1”.
In the “IP Client Configuration” area of the menu, touch the {Edit} button and add the KissBox
IP address and information. Finally touch the {Apply} button.

Back in the “Protocols” menu, touch the {Activate} button to activate the protocol. The
“Activate” button will turn from orange to green.
Note: In the Panel Config - MAV Layout menu, add the external MAV-Audio Fader modules.

9.17.8.5 Kula Peripherals Setup
Touch the {Peripherals} menu button, then in the Peripherals main menu, touch the {Audio
mixer…} menu link button.
In the “Audio Mixer” menu, use the “Fader Module Assign” parameters to assign the
MAV-Fader modules to the “Protocol Slot” this will allow the MAV-Faders to work with the
Yamaha Audio Mixer.

Use the protocol “Source” parameter to map the protocol sources to the Yamaha Inputs,
Auxes, Buses, Groups etc.
See the “Protocol Source Mapping” tables at the rear of this document as a reference.
Assign a fader type in the menu (MAV-Audio Fader) for each fader to enable the Yamaha
communication.
You should be able to slide faders via the Visual or Fader Module and see corresponding
faders move on Yamaha Audio Mixer for communication test.
Parameters:
Slot - this relates to the protocol setup slot that the Yamaha protocol was assigned to in Eng
Config - Protocols.
Module - this relates to the MAV-GUI/s connected to the Kula control surface. The first being
1-8 which relates to the faders on the MAV-Audio Fader module.
Fader - relates to the Faders on the selected (Module) MAV-Audio Fader module.

Button - this selects one of the 4 types of buttons above the fader sliders in the menu. The
buttons are:
• Cut - this will cut the fader On or Off.
• PFL - (Pre Fade Listen), this displays if the “PFL” function is set or available to use.
PFL allows the user to listen to the channel's audio at a point before the fader takes
effect.
• AVFO - (Audio Follow Video Override), this is an audio sources that is associated with
a video source which can be linked in the Fader Map.
• Learn - this allows the button to copy a button function from the audio mixer.
Source - this is the Protocol Source that is mapped to the audio mixer's Inputs, Aux, Buses
etc. (see the Protocol Source map table at the back of this document).
Type - this sets the type of audio fader control in the menu, see below (Unassigned means
that no fader type is selected).
Type - Channel Type - Group
Type - VCA Master Type - VCA Main
Type - Track

Audio Mixer Parameters Continued:
Cut - On/Off. This displays if the “Cut” function is set or available to use.
PFL (Pre Fade Listen) - On/Off. This displays if the “PFL” function is set or available to use.
PFL allows the user to listen to the channel's audio at a point before the fader takes effect.
Level - this is the fader audio level; the level is default at 0dB, with a range of - infinity to
10dB.
Follow Video - On/Off. Touch the {Configure…} menu link button at the top of the menu to go
to the Audio Follow Video menu.
The Follow Video Menu Allows the user to map a Crosspoint to a Yamaha audio mixer
Source. When the Tally Now is configured (Eng Config, Output Setup, Tally) Any Crosspoint
that goes to air, the assigned protocol audio source will also go to air. If there is no transition
time, the audio faders will use the quick crossfade cut buttons to follow, otherwise they will
follow the transition time to air. The user can also set a transition delay, which delays the time
for the audio source to go to air after the crosspoint has gone to air.

9.17.8.6 Audio Follow Video Configuration Test
In the Peripherals - Audio Mixer menu, touch the {Configure…} menu link button to open the
“Audio Follow Video menu.
Again in this menu use the “Protocol Source” parameter to map a “Protocol Source” to the
Kula Crosspoint.
See the “Protocol Source Mapping” tables at the rear of this section as a reference.

To see a Fader Move set the “Trans Time” to video standard field rate and greater (less than
field rate will act as a quick crossfade cut on/off).
Set the desired non muted level for each Crosspoint.
On the Kula GUI, touch the “arrow up” button to get to the “Top” menu. Touch the {Defaults…}
menu link button. In the “Defaults” menu, touch the {Engineering Config…} menu link button.
The menu now displayed is the “Engineering - Config” menu. Touch the {Output Setup…}
menu link button and in the menu, ensure 'Tally Now' is on for desired BNC O/P.
Cutting along the desired bus will trigger the fader to crossfade to non muted level as
Crosspoint goes to air.

9.17.8.7 Additional Functionality using the Yamaha Audio Mixer menus
MIDI Protocol Control Features
• Inputs 1 to 32 Fader and Cut Button Control - Split over 2 layers (Layer 1 and Layer 2)
- Kula Fader Protocol Source {1 - 32}
• Aux Outputs 1 to 8 Fader and Cut Button Control - Master Layer - Kula Fader Protocol
Source {113 - 120}
• Bus Outputs 1 to 8 Fader and Cut Button Control - Master Layer - Kula Fader Protocol
Source {129 - 136}
• Stereo Inputs 1 - 4 Visual Fader and Cut Button Control - ST IN 1/3, ST IN 2/4 - Kula
Fader Protocol Source {33,34} {35,36}, {37, 38}, {39, 40}
• Input and Output Master Fader Group - Visual Fader and Cut Button Control (can be
mapped to a physical remote fader layer as a user assignable layer)
On the Yamaha Audio Mixer user interface, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR/GROUP]
button and select IN FADER or OUT FADER Menu, to set Fader Input Master Group (A-H).
For Input Channels 1-32 and Output Master Group (Q - T) for Auxes 1 -8 and Busses 1 - 8.
Ensure that INPUT FADER MASTER or OUTPUT FADER MASTER is checked and the
Desired LAYER is selected. Then press the [SEL] button for the channel you wish to assign to
the group (data entry controls maybe useful here).

The corresponding Protocol Sources for Kula control of Fader Input Master Group(A-H) are
{145 - 152} and Fader Output Master Group (Q - T) are {161 - 164}.
The Visual Fader can be mapped to a physical fader on the Yamaha desk by assigning to the
remote layer.
1. Select [REMOTE] Layer or DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] and set the Target to 'USER
ASSIGNABLE LAYER' in Remote Menu.
2. Select the group channel you wish to assign to using the Parameter 1 - 16 boxes.

Bus Out (1 - 8) to Stereo Bus Visual Fader and Cut Button Control - Kula Fader Protocol
Source {177 - 184}.
Select DISPLAY ACCESS - PAN/ROUTING - BUS TO ST Menu or [MASTER] and DISPLAY
ACCESS [VIEW] and [SEL] Bus for view.
Stereo Out - Fader and Cut Button Control - Kula Fader Protocol Source {Main1, Main2}.

9.17.8.8 Kula Protocol Source to Yamaha Input Map List
Yamaha (01V96) Audio Mixer
Pr otocol Source Input Map

1 INPUT 1
2 INPUT 2
: :
32 INPUT 32
33 ST I N 1L
34 ST IN 1R
35 ST I N 2L
36 ST IN 2R
37 ST I N 3L
38 ST IN 3R
39 ST I N 4L
40 ST IN 4R
Protocol Source Aux Out Map

113 AUX 1
114 AUX 2
: :
120 AUX 8
Protocol Source Bus Out Map

129 BUS 1
130 BUS 2
: :
136 BUS 8
Protocol Source Input Group Master Map

145 INPUT A
146 INPUT B
: :
152 INPUT H
Protocol Source Output Group Master Map

161 OUTPUT Q
162 OUTPUT R
163 OUTPUT S
164 OUTPUT T
Protocol Source Bus O ut To Stereo Bus Map

177 BUS 1
178 BUS 2
: :
184 BUS 8
Protocol Source Stereo Out Map

Main 1 STEREO OUT L
Main 2 STEREO OUT R

9.17.9 VISCA Robotics Camera Control

With the release of V1.3 software, Kula can now use the VISCA protocol. Kula is now able to
control a range of robotic CCD cameras, with the ability of a remote pan/tilt/zoom operation.
Kula uses an RS422 (IP Client) port and VISCA protocol to communicate and control the
device.
9.17.9.1 RS422 Cable Information
An Ethernet to RS422 cable with 9 Pin D-type connector at one end and a connector that
suites the interface to the camera. (this example uses the Sony EVI-D70P camera) Use the
following pin out information:
Kula Ethernet - RS422 VISCA Control Port
Pin 1 Pin 1
Pin 2 Pin 2
Pin 3 Pin 3
Pin 4 Pin 4
Pin 5 Pin 5
Pin 6 Pin 6
Pin 7 Pin 7
Pin 8 Pin 8
Pin 9 Pin 9
9.17.9.2 Connecting Kula to the Sony Camera
Monitor
Input to Mainframe
Output to Monitor
Kula Mainframe (rear) Sony Camera
Ethernet to RS422
Kula 2M/E Control Surface Sony Camera Lead
Touch Screen GUI

9.17.9.3 Protocol Setup
In the “Connected to Kula Mainframe” menu, touch the {Defaults...} menu link button, then in
the Defaults menu, touch the {Engineering Config...} menu link button.
In the “Engineering Config” menu touch the {Protocols...} menu link button.
In the “Protocols” menu, use the “Protocol Type” parameter to scroll down to the
“Miscellaneous” option. User the “Available Protocol” parameter to select “VISCA”, select a
free slot in the “Loaded Protocols” table and touch the {Load} button.

Next, touch the {Configure…} menu link button to enter the “Protocol Config” menu.
Use the “Transport Type” parameter to select “RS422 (IP Client)”

Finally touch the {Apply} button.
9.17.9.4 Using the VISCA Protocol
Touch the {Peripherals} menu link button, then in the Peripherals menu touch the {VISCA
Robotics...} menu link button.

Once in the VISCA Robotics menu, using the Port parameter select the RS422 port (named
VISCA) that is connected to the camera, once connected, one of the camera control buttons
will turn Blue with a number, up to 7 cameras can be connected.
Controlling the Camera
There are two ways to control the robotic camera:
Using the Pre-Defined Command parameter
Using the Kula Control Surface joystick
Pre-Defined Camera Commands
The first method described here will be using the Pre-Defined camera commands in the
Command parameter.
The pre-defined camera commands are selected by touching one of the commands and then
pressing the Blue Camera button, the camera will then move and keep moving until a different
command is selected.

Pre-defined Camera Commands
Select
Power On
Power Off
Pan Tilt Stop
Tilt Up
Tilt Down
Pan Left
Pan Right
Tilt Up, Pan Left
Tilt Up, Pan Right
Tilt Down, Pan Left
Tilt Down, Pan Right
Pan Tilt Home
Pan Tilt Reset
Zoom Stop
Zoom Tele (Standard)
Zoom Wide (Standard)
Focus Stop
Focus Far (Standard)
Focus Near (Standard)
Manual Focus
Auto Focus
Auto/Manual Focus
Shutter Reset
Shutter Up
Shutter Down
Iris Reset
Iris Up
Iris Down
Gain Reset
Gain Up
Gain Down
Brightness Reset
Brightness Up
Brightness Down
Memory Reset

Pan Speed and Tilt Speed parameters are only available when controlling the camera with
pre-defined commands. When panning left or right, adjust the Pan Speed parameter using the
GUI rotary control knob and the camera head will speed up or slow down. The same action is
defined when using the Tilt Speed parameter.
Note: Pan, Tilt, Zoom and Focus can be used when using the pre-defined commands, but they
will override the current Pan/Tilt/Zoom/Focus type commands
9.17.9.5 Using the Kula Control Surface Joystick to control the Camera
Touch the Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Focus attacher to attach the parameter controls to the Control
Panel joystick.
Moving the joystick to the left or right will make the camera pan to the left or right.
Moving the joystick up or down will make the camera tilt up or down.
Rotating the joystick head will make the camera focus in or out.

Note: If the Pan/Tilt moves the opposite way to what is expected, select the Pan Reverse or Tilt
Reverse parameters and set them to On. The camera will now move in the correct
direction.
9.17.9.6 Saving Camera positions into the Camera Memory
The camera is able to store up to 16 different camera memory positions.
Move the camera to the required position, use the Memory parameter to select a memory
position and then press Memory Set. If the memorized camera position is required in the
future, select the memory location and then press Memory Recall and the camera will move
to the memorized position.

10. UHD Setup and Operation - UHD Quad and UHD 2SI
Working in UHD with Kula is as simple as working in any other video format, the user can
select between UHD-Quadrant mode or UHD-2SI mode. The setup menu structure is easy
and intuitive and will allow the user setup UHD with just a few button presses. UHD
demonstrates the power and flexibility of Kula, where the 2x UHD Key Layers and 1x DSK are
available, transitions are easy, a UHD Keyed source such as Clip transitions or UHD graphics
can be keyed over the full UHD screen.
10.1 Connecting UHD to the Inputs and Outputs

The first step to understand when using UHD with Kula is how to correctly connect a UHD
source to the inputs and outputs of the mainframe.
10.1.1 Inputs to the Switcher Mainframe

There are 42 inputs on the mainframe, this will give the user 10x - UHD inputs (10 groups of 4
BNC inputs). The 4 quadrants of the UHD source have to be connected to consecutive BNCs
so that the Input Setup menu can be setup correctly (this will be explained in the following
sections).
The 4x UHD quadrants have to be connected in the following order, for example; Input 1 (top
left), Input 2 (top right), Input 3 (bottom left) and Input 4 (bottom right), then the next source
Inputs 5, 6, 7 and 8 following the same quadrant order. So, the first quadrant of each UHD
source is connected to Inputs 1, input 5 and the next Input 9 etc.
10.1.2 Outputs from the Switcher Mainframe

There are 12 outputs from the mainframe, this will allow the user to have 3x - UHD outputs,
PGM (programme), PVW (preview) and Clean. Once again, the 4 quadrants of the UHD
source have to connected to consecutive BNCs so that the Output Setup menu can be setup
correctly. As with the input setup, the UHD quadrants have to be connected in the following
order, for example; Output 1 (top left), Output 2 (top right), Output 3 (bottom left) and Output 4
(bottom right), then the next source Output 5, Output 6, Output 7 and Output 8. So, the first
quadrant of each UHD source is connected to Output 1, Output 5, Output 9.The first quadrant
cannot start at Output 2 or Output 6.

10.2 UHD Initial Setup

The first step in enabling UHD is in the “Mainframe Config” menu, in the logged out state in
the connect menu.
Touching the {Mainframe Config} button will open the “Mainframe Configuration” menu.
Touch the {UHD} button to select UHD mode, then press the {Up} button to go back to the
“Connect” menu, then touch the {Switcher Login} button to log back into the Kula
operational menus.
Once back in the “Connected to Kula Mainframe” menu, the user has two choices when
setting up UHD, either touch one of the presetup UHD Shows at the top of the menu and
UHD will be setup ready to use or the user can manually setup UHD by following the
information through this section.
Touch the {Defaults...} button, then in the Defaults menu, touch the {Engineering Config...}
button.
The Engineering Config menu is where the user will enable UHD mode and setup all the UHD
inputs and outputs.

10.2.1 UHD Engineering Config Setup

In the Engineering Config main menu, touch the {System Standard...} button to enter the
System Standard menu.
The System Standard menu can be set to “UHD Mode - Quadrant” or “UHD Mode - 2SI”,
however the user can choose between the UHD standards by touching the “Popup” button top
right to reveal a “New Standard” dialog box. From the dialog box the user can select what type
of UHD standard the system is set to, as shown below.
Select between UHD-Q or UHD-2SI, the frequency and the type of UHD required - UHD
Segmented Frame or UHD Slow, then press the {Apply Standard} button.
The next thing to do is to setup the Inputs and Outputs.

10.2.2 UHD Input Setup

Touch the {Input Setup...} button, in this menu the user will setup all the UHD inputs to the
mainframe.
As stated at the start of this chapter, in UHD mode, there will be 4x inputs for every UHD
source input to the mainframe, which consist of Input 1 (top left), Input 2 (top right), Input 3
(bottom left) and Input 4 (bottom right). Select Input 1, then touch the “UHD Input” {Yes}
button.
Notice that Inputs 1 to 4 are now ganged together as Input 1 (shown below).
The next input to select is Input 5, then touch the “UHD Input” {Yes} button, then inputs 5 to 8
are ganged together. This can be repeated up to another 8 times, allowing ten UHD sources
input to the mainframe.

10.2.3 UHD Output Setup

Setting up the UHD outputs on Kula is very similar to setting up the inputs, where the outputs
are grouped in fours.
Touch the {Output Setup...} button and the menu will look like the one below.
Touch the OP1 row to select it, then set the “UHD Input” to {Yes}, the first 4 outputs are now
ganged together (see below), in the same way as the inputs, so now Outputs 1 to 4 make up
the first UHD-quad output.
As can be seen above, the first UHD-quad output has been named PGM, now select Output
5, and turn on “UHD Output” and once again outputs 5 to 8 will be ganged, use the “Name”
parameter to call the second UHD-quad output PVW.
Payload UHD Channel Id - Adds the Channel ID data when in UHD such that downstream
equipment can identify the 4 channels.

10.2.4 UHD Stores

There are two UHD Stores and two 1080p Stores available to use in the Store menu in UHD
mode. With the system set to UHD mode, touch the {Store} button to open the “Store - Load”
menu.
As can be seen in the menu above, there are 4 Stores available to use, Stores 1 & 2 are the
UHD Stores, Stores 3 & 4 are the 1080p Stores. To load a UHD still into a Store, select Store
1 for example and then touch the {Load} button. The video standard, aspect ratio, video clip
duration and audio clip duration is displayed in the “Fill” area in the center of the menu.
If a UHD Store has Key and Fill layers, then the two layers will need to be coupled. Touch the
{Store Setup...} button, then select Store 1 in the table and then touch the “Coupled Store”
parameter, the Key and Fill between Store 1 & 2 is now coupled and ready to key over a
background image.

10.2.5 UHD Transitions and Wipes

Transitions and Wipes in UHD mode, works exactly the same way as using Kula in any other
video format. All of the wipe patterns, wipe controls, border fill and border position all work in
exactly the same way.
Note: For further information about setup and using the Transition function, see the “Operator
Information” chapter in this manual.

11. 12G-SDI Setup and Operation

Kula 12G-SDI is engineered with a single link 12G-SDI infrastructure. Kula 12G-SDI offers
12G-SDI BNCs for UHD connectivity, as well as 3G BNCs for Quad link signals; HD sources
are also available. Whilst using the Kula mainframe in UHD mode, the user is now able to
have a single link UHD input or output using the 12Gbps BNC connectors, the system does
not have to have Quad link signals anymore.
The Kula 12G-SDI mainframe has:
• 40x Inputs, 10x of those inputs are 12G-SDI BNC connectors (silver in color).
• 14 outputs (UHD mode), 3x of those outputs are 12G - SDI Connectors (silver in
color).
A B C C
A = Outputs
B = In UHD mode these can also be used as outputs.
C = Inputs
Kula 12G-SDI features include:
• 1 M/E with 3 Keyers
• UHD functionality
• HD/1080p/1080i and UHD in the same mainframe
• SDI connectivity for 12G sources and 3G sources
• 10 x 12G-SDI inputs / 40 x HD inputs
• FormatFusion3TM
• Internal ClipStore
Important: The “silver” BNCs on the Kula Mainframe shown above, these are the 12G-SDI Inputs and
Outputs.

11.0.1 Set the System up in UHD Mode

As mentioned earlier, to use the 12G-SDI BNCs as UHD inputs and outputs, the mainframe
has to be placed into UHD mode.
The first step in enabling UHD mode is to put the GUI into the logged out state in the
“Connect” menu.
Touching the {Mainframe Config} button will open the “Mainframe Configuration” menu. In
the “Mainframe Configuration” menu, touch the {UHD} button to select UHD mode, then
press the {Up} button to go back to the “Connect” menu.
Finally, touch the {Switcher Login} button to log back into the Kula operational menus.
Important: Notice that when a touch screen GUI is connected to a Kula 12G-SDI mainframe, the logo
in the bottom left corner of the menu has “12G” under the Kula name.

Once back in the “Connected to Kula Mainframe” menu, the user has two choices when
setting up UHD, either touch one of the preset UHD Shows at the top of the menu and UHD
will be setup ready to use or the user can manually setup UHD by following the information
through this section.
Touch the {Defaults...} button, then in the Defaults menu, touch the {Engineering Config...}
button. UHD Engineering Config Setup.
In the Engineering Config main menu, touch the {System Standard...} button to enter the
System Standard menu.
The System Standard menu can be set to “UHD Mode - Quadrant” or “UHD Mode - 2SI”,
however the user can choose between the UHD standards by touching the “Popup” button top
right to reveal a “New Standard” dialog box. From the dialog box the user can select what
type of UHD standard the system is set to, as shown below.
Select between UHD-Q or UHD-2SI, the frequency and the type of UHD required - UHD
Segmented Frame or UHD Slow, then press the {Apply Standard} button.
The next thing to do is to setup the Inputs and Outputs.

11.0.2 12G SDI Input Setup

Touch the {Input Setup...} button, in this menu the user will setup all the UHD inputs to the
mainframe.
As stated at the start of this chapter, in UHD mode, there will be 4x inputs for every UHD
source input to the mainframe, which consist of Input 1 (top left), Input 2 (top right), Input 3
(bottom left) and Input 4 (bottom right). Select Input 1, then touch the “UHD Input” {Yes}
button.
Notice that Inputs 1 to 4 are now ganged together as Input 1 (shown below).
The next input to select is Input 5, then touch the “UHD Input” {Yes} button, then inputs 5 to 8
are ganged together. This can be repeated up to another 8 times, allowing ten UHD sources
input to the mainframe.
Important: Please note that there are no parameter adjustments in the Input Setup menu for setting up
12G-SDI, it is automatically set once the inputs are set to “UHD Input”.
As each UHD input is selected in the inputs table, 12G-SDI sources to the mainframe can
now be connected to the following BNC inputs as required: 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29, 33 and
40 (the silver color BNCs).

11.0.3 12G-SDI Output Setup

Setting up the UHD outputs on Kula is very similar to setting up the inputs, where the outputs
are grouped in fours.
Touch the {Output Setup...} button and the menu will look like the one below.
Touch the OP1 row to select it, then set the “UHD Input” to {Yes}, the first 4 outputs are now
ganged together (see below), in the same way as the inputs, so now Outputs 1 to 4 make up
the first UHD-quad output.
Important: 12G-SDI setup - Notice that there is a parameter control called “12G Output” This has to
be set to “Yes” for each of the 12G-SDI outputs.
Set the “12G Output” parameter to “Yes” and the first 12G-SDI BNC can be connected to
output 1 (silver BNC). As the other outputs are setup as UHD outputs in the outputs table, the
12G Output parameter can be set to “Yes” for outputs 1, 5 and 9 (the silver BNCs)

12. Operator Information
12.1 Switcher Setup

The Switcher Setup area of Kula is broken down into 3 main areas M/Es, SMEs and DSKs
and it is where Transitions, Key Layers and DVE for the three main categories are all setup.
For each main category, the setup menus for transitions, Key Layers etc all have a similar
look and feel, so it is very easy to move between them and use the control parameters.
The switcher setup for an M/E will be described in full, so that only differences and slight
variances will need to be described for the SMEs and DSKs.
12.2 M/E3 Setup

With the release of V2.1r1 (and greater) software, Kula has the ability to be setup as a 3M/E
switcher, allowing the user to add a 3rd physical M/E control surface.
To setup the 3rd M/E, the user will have to log off the switcher by touching the “Up” button,
then in the top menu, touch the {Defaults} button. In the Defaults menu touch the {Log Off
From Mainframe} button.

In the “Connect” menu, touch the {Mainframe Config} button. In the Mainframe
Configuration menu, touch the {SME 1& 2 As ME3} button.
The button will turn green and the SME1 & 2 buttons are now grayed out. SME 1 & 2 have
now combined their resources to create a 3rd M/E.
Press the {Up} button to go back to the “Connect” menu and log back into the switcher.

As mentioned earlier, the resources of SME1 & 2 have been combined. In the “Connected”
menu, M/E3 can now be selected and used the same way as M/E1 & 2, with all the same
menus as explained later in this chapter.
When using M/E3 in the Keyer menus, note that when using the DVE menu, the DVE
functionality is available for Keys 1 & 2 only. Keys 3 & 4 are still available to use with all other
Key functions.

12.3 Using the M/E Menus

As can be seen in the menu below, once the user has entered one of the switcher setup
menus, all of the sub menus and parameter controls are easily accessed. In the menu below
M/E1 has been selected. If any of the main switcher setup selection buttons are grayed out,
this means that it is not selectable.
On entering the M/E1 Switcher Setup menu the first menu selected here is the Transition
menu.
12.3.1 Transitions
The three main types of transition that will be described in this section of the manual. These
are:
• Background Transitions
• Key Transitions
• Clip transitions (or MAV Trans)
Note: When the system has gone through the startup sequence, each of the transition T-bars
need to be calibrated by moving the T-bars from end stop to end stop position.
12.3.2 Setting Basic Transitions

Independent transitions can be set for the Background, for each of the Key Layers and a MAV
Trans.
12.3.3 Basic Background Transitions

In the Transition area on the control surface, press the [BGND] and then move the T-bar from
end to end and notice that a transition is made between the selected crosspoint sources on
the PGM/PVW or background A/B.

12.3.4 Basic Background Transition with a Wipe

In the Transition area on the control surface, press the [BGND] and the [WIPE] buttons on
and they will light up (notice that the {Wipe} and {Background} buttons in the menu are also
lit green). In the menu, touch the required wipe pattern from the list, then move the T-bar from
end to end and notice that a transition is made between the selected crosspoint sources on
the PGM/PVW or background A/B.
Rotary Controls
wipe Pattern
selection

12.3.5 Basic Key Transitions
Select the Key or Keys in the Transition or in the menu, then in the Transition area or in the
menu touch the {Mix} button and move the T-bar from end stop to end stop. Notice that the
Key Layer will now transition over the A/B background.
If a Wipe transition is required, touch the {Wipe} button in the Transition area of the control
surface, or in the transition menu, The type of transition wipe required can be selected using
the “Wipe Pattern” parameter, use the associated rotary control to scroll through the wipe
patterns. Move the T-bar from end stop to end stop. Notice that the Key Layer will now
transition with a wipe pattern over the A/B background.

12.3.6 Transition Control Button Functions
BGND and KEY 1 to KEY 4

These five buttons enable the use of a Background or Key Layers’ own transition. They can
all have their own Wipe, Mix, Matte Mix etc. Any or all of these buttons can be selected as
required. The transition for the selected layer(s) is started by pressing the T-bar, AUTO button
or CUT button. Pressing any one of these buttons will clear all others. Holding one button
down and then pressing any others will make all of those selected active. For Key Layers, this
facility allows one or more of the Key Layers to be transitioned, using a different transition for
each layer, at the same time as the background transition.
MIX
Selects Mix as the main transition, causing bus swap.
WIPE
Selects Wipe as the main transition, causing bus swap.
CUT
An immediate “Cut” between the Background or Key sources causing bus swap.
AUTO
Starts an automatic pre-timed transition, using whatever transition types and times have been
selected for the layers included in the transition. The transition time for each layer can be
different as can any time offsets.
T-Bar
Performs a manual transition using whatever transition types have been selected for the
layers included in the transition.

12.4 Transition Parameters

When the {Transition} button is touched the initial default Transition menu appears with the
main Transition Time and Profile parameters active, this will allow the user to make basic
adjustments to a background or Key transition. The top of the menu indicates which M/E
Background or Key the transition wipe will effect, as shown below.
12.4.1 Wipe Parameters

This will describe the initial default transition menu functions and parameters.
Note: Transition Time, Profile and Shape parameter are the same for Wipe, Mix and Matte Mix
menus.
Transition Time - This sets the time that it takes for a transition to take place. The user can
control the transition time by either using the rotary controls on the control surface to adjust
the transition time or touch the {Popup} button in the Transition Time parameter and key in
the time using the on-screen number pad. One the transition time is set, press the [AUTO]
button on the control surface and the transition will take place to the set time.
Profile - This parameter control will adjust the curve profile in the display box under the Main
heading. Adjusting the curve profile will make the transition speed up or slowdown at a
specific time in the transition period.
Shape - Selecting one of the Shape options will depict the type of profile curve; this will alter
the acceleration rate for a transition.
• Linear - constant transition, no change in transition acceleration
• Cubic C and Sin C - these profiles are similar to each other, the default transition will
have a fast acceleration at the start and slowdown towards the end.
• Cubic S and Sin S - these profiles are also similar to each other, the default transition
will accelerate at the start slow down towards the mid point and accelerate again.
Shapes Parameters
Linear Cubic C Cubic S Sine C Sine S

Note: The following parameter are the same for Wipe, Mix and Matte Mix menus.
Wipe Pattern - Adjust to select the required wipe pattern. There are a number of individual
wipe patterns available. The number of available wipe patterns will vary depending on
whether the background or Key is selected.
Softness - This parameter adjusts the softness of the leading edge or edges of the selected
wipe pattern. 0% is the default setting which Shows a hard clean edge and 100% blends the
edge into the background making it barely visible until the transition is complete.
Border - This turns the border function On/Off
Border Width - If a border has been selected for example on a square wipe which starts from
the center of the screen, the width of the border in relation to the edge of the wipe can be
adjusted.
Border Fill - Select the border Fill from either a Matte or one of the two Util Buses, as
described in the Mix menu structure.

Matte Selector - Select the required Matte from the options or Local Matte.
Hue, Luma and Saturation will only affect the Local Matte setting.
Matte Hue - sets the actual Matte color. The rotary control operates a 360 degree color wheel
where:
0 = Red
60 = Magenta
120 = Blue
180 = Cyan
240 = Green
300 = Yellow
Matte Luma - The Luminance or brightness control affects the selected Matte Hue. The
parameter adjusts from 0 to 100% where 0% is no luminance or Black and 100% is maximum
brightness.
Matte Sat - The saturation control affects the selected Matte Hue. The parameter adjusts
from 0 to 100% where 0% is no saturation or no color i.e. only shades of Gray and 100% is
fully saturated or maximum color.
Position - Touch any one of the On/Off buttons in the parameter controls. This will set all the
buttons to the On position if they are currently off.
X Position Y Position - The wipe start position can be adjusted to start anywhere on-screen
by changing the parameters in the X/Y Position attacher box. Touching any of the On/Off
buttons will activate all three parameter boxes. Notice that the Red indicators in the parameter
boxes are triangles denoting that the parameters can be adjusted using the rotary controls or
by using the joystick on the control panel.
Rotation - This will rotate the wipe pattern clock-wise or counter clock-wise in increments.
Aspect Ratio - Touch the On/Off button to activate the aspect ration function. As the name
suggests, this function changes the aspect ratio of a wipe pattern, 0 to -100% will change the
vertical ratio and 0 to +100% will adjust the horizontal ratio.
Note: Aspect ratio will only adjust a limited number of the wipe patterns.

When scrolling through the wipe patterns, notice the wipe pattern adjustment indicator box at
the bottom of the wipe menu. When a wipe is selected this box will display parameters that
denote how the wipe can be adjusted. Touch this box and a set of adjustment parameters will
appear on the right of the menu. These are X,Y Position, Rotation and Aspect Ratio,
depending on the wipe selected.
X/Y Position
Rotation Aspect Ratio
Parameters

12.4.2 Advanced Wipes

The Advanced Wipe parameters offer additional wipe patterns that are created by combining
the main wipe patterns. For example if a straight edge primary wipe is combined with a
secondary circle wipe, the resulting wipe edge will now have a bowed effect, as shown in the
example below.
In the Advanced Wipes area of the manu, there are 2 parameters; “Modulation Enable” and
“Repeats Enable”. The first thing to describe is the Modulation Enable.
Modulation Parameters
With Modulation Enable turned On, the modulation function enables the user to add different
modulation effects to the transition wipe effects.
Shape - selects the type of modulation effect
HAmp - controls the horizontal amplitude (peak to trough distance) of the modulation
HFreq - controls the horizontal frequency (number of peaks per centimeter) of the modulation
HPhase - controls the start point of the of the modulation and thus the relative position of the
peaks and troughs to the horizontal edge of the wipe
VAmp - controls the vertical amplitude (peak to trough distance) of the modulation
VFreq - controls the vertical frequency (number of peaks per centimeter) of the modulation

VPhase - controls the start point of the of the modulation and thus the relative position of the
peaks and troughs to the vertical edge of the wipe.
Example of Vertical Modulation
Repeats Enable
The Repeats menus will as the name suggests, this will repeat the wipe pattern a
user-defined number of times.
Turn the Repeats Enable parameter On
Wipe Repeats - Horizontal/Vertical, this will determine the number of repeated wipe patterns
horizontally or vertically.
Wipe Blocks - With some wipe patterns that use a block effect, such as wipe shapes 89, 90,
91 for example, adjusting these parameters will add extra horizontal an vertical blocks to the
wipe effect.

12.4.3 Mix
This allows a Background or a Key source to mix during a transition.
12.4.4 Matte Mix

Matte Mix Profile - The Matte Mix Profile is where the output passes through the Matte mix
color between the two transition sources. This will cause the transition to go from the first
source through a selected matte color to the second source.
Fill Level - This is the amount of Matte added to the mix. 100% is the full amount of Matte
added.
Bias - This adjust the point that the Matte is introduced into the transition i.e. more Matte at
the start of the transition and less at the end of the transition, or the other way around.
Width - This will override the bias parameter and introduce a full Matt throughout the
transition at 100%.

Fill - This function selects the type of source that will be used as a Matte. The options range
from Matte, Util Bus 1 and 2. The Util Bus Fill is setup in the Util Bus menu. Touch the
{Util/Misc} button on the GUI to see which crosspoint the Util Bus's are set to reference.
Matte Selector - Select the required Matte from the options Local Matte or MAT 1 to MAT 16.
Hue, Luma and Saturation will only affect the Local Matte setting.
Matte Hue - sets the actual Matte color, the rotary control operates a 360 degree color wheel
where:
0 = Red
60 = Magenta
120 = Blue
180 = Cyan
240 = Green
300 = Yellow
Matte Luma - The Luminance or brightness control affects the selected Matte Hue, the
parameter adjusts from 0 to 100% where 0% is no luminance or Black and 100% is maximum
brightness.
Matte Sat - The saturation control affects the selected Matte Hue, the parameter adjusts from
0 to 100% where 0% is no saturation or no color i.e. only shades of Gray and 100% is fully
saturated or maximum color.
12.4.5 NAM/FAM
NAM - Non-Additive Mix profile, this is where the brighter parts of either source are more
prominent than the darker parts during the transition. Thus the brighter parts of the fading out
source are apparent for longer than the darker parts. A normal mix will fade out equally across
all brightness levels.
FAM - Full-Additive Mix profile, this is where the luminance parts of each source are added
together so that at the mid point through the transition, the luminance of both sources are at
100%.
PREVIEW TRANS
Allows the next transition to be previewed on the preview monitor without affecting the
program output.

12.5 MAV Trans

The MAV Trans function allows a Key transition to be associated with a selected Store from
an internal source. As a transition is made between Pgm/Pvw backgrounds, the clip will
become part of the transition as an effect.
12.5.1 Setting up a basic MAV Trans

In the selected M/E touch the “MAV Trans” menu link button. The first thing to do is to make
sure that the clip that is going to be used has a Key and associated Fill and that the User
Config - Store Setup menu has a Key/Fill coupling setup for the Stores that the clip will be
loaded into.
Once this is done, use the “Store Contents” attacher to select the correct clip. The attacher
displays the associated information about the selected clip, including the Standard, Video
length and format. Then in the MAV Trans menu, select {Linear} or {Luma}, so that the clip
can be Keyed over the Pgm/Pvw background.
To test the MAV Trans, press the [MAV TRANS] button (shown below), and move the T-Bar
from end to end. The clip is shown as part of the transition.
Pgm/Pvw Transition with clip

Transition time and transition offset by default are set to {Auto}, but may need adjusting
depending on the timing of the clip in relation to the Pgm/Pvw transition. By switching to
{Manual}, the user is able to adjust the MAV Trans Offset parameter to their own preference
so that the clip can be introduced into the transition at a defined point.
If there are Key Layers that have been set as part of the transition, the priority level of the clip
in the MAV Trans can be changed using the {Up}/{Down} buttons in the Priority area of the
menu.
A Mix or Wipe can also be introduced as part of the MAV Trans using the Mix/Wipe {Settings}
menu.
Change the “Use Main Trans Settings” parameter to No, then press the {Settings} button.
The menu will allow the user to select introduce a Mix, Wipe or Matte Mix into the transition
MAV Trans with a Circle wipe

and blue border.
The Mix/Wipe transition parameters are the same as explained in the Transition section of
this manual.

12.6 Util/Misc
Kula has 2 Util Buses per M/E and SME, which equals up to 8 Util Buses in a 2M/E Kula
mainframe. Util Buses are used as Borders, Backgrounds and Masks etc. In this menu, the
user can set the sources for the Util Buses
The parameter controls associated with the menu are used to set the sources for the Utility
Buses.
The table in the menu displays the crosspoint and the sources currently selected for the Util
Buses.
Crosspoint Lock is used to lock crosspoints on selected utility buses so that the crosspoints
and sources cannot be changed. Lock All will lock all crosspoints.
Utility Buses are selected on the Control Surface using the “Delegate” toggle buttons. Use the
white scroll Up/Down buttons to scroll down to the required Util Bus and then press the OLED
button to select.

12.7 Keying
12.7.1 Keying Theory

Keying is the process of inserting a specific part of one video signal (Key signal) into another
video signal (background) to create a third signal. The Key signal has two jobs and may be
one signal or two. It has to cut a hole into the background and Fill that hole with a picture, or a
matte.
Where two signals are used one, the Key Cut, cuts the hole in the background and the other,
the Key Fill, Fills that hole. The Fill has to be shaped to match the hole.
Where one signal is used it both cuts and Fills the hole. This process of Keying with a single
signal is known as a self Key or video Key.
There are three types of Keying available with Kula; they are Luma Keying, Linear Keying and
Chroma Keying.
12.7.2 Linear Keying

Linear Keying is used where the Key signal is already Keyed, i.e., the area outside the
required video is at black level. It is also used where there are separate Key Cut and Key Fill
signals. The Key signal(s), (Cut and Fill) are usually anti-aliased (soft edged) shaped signals
created by a character generator or graphics system.
12.7.3 Luma Keying

Luma Keying is a Keying system that is typically used on sources that are not pre-Keyed,
such as those from a camera. The Key Cut signal is generated from the video signal using lift
and gain controls. The portions of the signal that is lower in luminance than the lift level cut
the hole in the Key Layer.
The Key lift and gain levels are user adjustable.
The Fill may be the same source as the Cut or from a different source, or matte generator.
When only one source is used for both Key Fill and Key Cut the Key is called a Self Key or a
Video Key.
12.7.4 Chroma Keying

In chroma keying the Key Cut signal is derived from color rather than level. A particular color
of a picture is keyed away to the background leaving the other colors visible over the
background. The transparent color is user selectable and may be a range of colors or a single
color. There are various controls to reduce fringing and other artifacts from appearing in the
composite picture.

12.8 Accessing Keys on the Control Surface.

The Kula has 4 Keys per M/E, and 2 Keys per SME. A Key can also be used in “Dual Tile”
mode which will create 2 Key Layers from one, meaning that an M/E which originally had 4
Key Layers, in Dual Tile mode now has 8 Key Layers (explained later in this section). There
are also 4 DSKs (down stream keys) that can be accessed, again, this will be discussed later
in this section.
Selecting a Key or DSK is a simply done using the Up/Down toggle buttons next to the OLED
button in “Delegate” area of the control surface. They allow the user to scroll through the
options and then press the OLED button to make the confirmation.
Scroll Up/Down toggle buttons
Press to make selection
Pressing both of the toggle buttons together will take the Delegate option back to Key 1.

12.9 Placing a Key Layer to an Output

This section of the manual will describe how to place a Key Layer onto a background. Keys 1
to 4 on an M/E are accessed using the “Delegate” control surface, described in the previous
section; the Key Bus buttons on the control surface are used to select the required key and
the required source is selected using the Key Bus Crosspoint buttons.
Key source Key Bus

selection Xpt selection buttons
buttons
The Key Layers can then be cut to the source output using the Transition control area of the
control surface.
Key On/Off Buttons
Placing a Key Layer onto a monitor is done by using the Key On/Off buttons shown at the top
in the diagram. The buttons toggle On/Off when pressed. With no Key Layer selected the
buttons are unlit, when pressed the button will either light white/blue or tallied red. The Key
Layer can now be seen on the monitor.
Note: White = off air, Red = tallied on air and contributing to the programme output
The color of the buttons may vary depending on the user-defined button color scheme.

12.10 Keyer
To get to the Keyer menus, touch and M/E or SME, {ME 1} (in this example) button in the top
left corner of the menu, then touch one of the {Key 1 - 4} buttons at the bottom of the menu to
open the Keyer main menu. The first menu to be displayed will be the “Keyer Setup” menu as
shown below:
Crosspoint - this parameter is used to select the source for the selected Key.
Split Key Xpt - this parameter is used to select the Key source when using “Split Key” mode.
Mix Time - sets the time where a Matte-mix source passes through the Matte color before
reaching the selected signal.
Matte Select - (when “Matte Fill” is selected) selects between Local Matte or Mattes 1 to 16.
Matte - Hue, Luma Sat - (when “Matte Fill” is selected) adjusts the color of the Local Matte
only. The Local Matte color adjustment is displayed as the color bar next to the parameter
controls.

12.10.1 Key Drop

A simple explanation for Key Drop is that it allows the user to automatically switch off (drop)
an active Key every time a new source is selected by cutting directly on the Program or Bgnd
A Bus of an M/E.
Note: Key Drop menus can also be accessed in the “Crosspoints” menu.
In the M/E - “Key Setup” menu, touch the {Key Drop} button and the User Config -
Crosspoint Key Drop menu will open (the Key Drop menu can also be accessed in the
“Crosspoints” menu).
In this top menu or “simple” menu, the user can select a Key, from the list of available M/Es or
SMEs (the selected Key will turn green).
When that Key is selected on the program or Bgnd A Bus, the next Xpt button selected on
that Bus will drop the Key. Notice that the Key is now shown on the Preview or Bgnd B Bus.
Using the T-bar or {CUT}/{AUTO} buttons, will place the Key back on the Program or Bgnd A
Bus, then next Xpt button pressed will drop the Key again.
Inhibit All - when this is lit, no Key Drop functions will be active
Clear All - removes all Drop/Add settings from the Simple and Advanced modes

The Advanced menu (touch the {Advanced} button) provides a more powerful automatic
control of Keyer on/off state which is dependent on the crosspoint selected on the Bgnd A
Bus.
This mode provides the user with the ability to have a Keyer active whenever a particular
source is on-air by setting rules for every crosspoint and including automatic selection of the
In Transition selection to ensure the keyer state is controlled by the Transition control.
Note: Key Drop settings are stored in User Config files
By selecting a Keyer on an ME, that Keyer will always turn off whenever a source is changed
by directly cutting on the Program or Bgnd A Bus.
Note: If a keyer has rules set in the Advanced mode, then this will be indicated by a Gold color on
the Legacy GUI or a half lit button on the MAV GUI.
The Inhibit All and Clear All functions for Key Drop can also be found on these menu pages.
Each source can have rules set to Add or Drop a specific keyer on each ME whenever that
source is selected on the Program or Bgnd A Bus of that ME.
12.10.1.1 Transition
By switching on this button, the selected ME will automatically set the In Transition states for
each of the Keyers which have Add/Drop rules applied in the Advanced Mode, depending on
which crosspoints are selected on the Bgnd A and B Bus. The In Transition buttons will light in
the Alert color to indicate that this In Transition state has automatically been set. The state of
other Keyer and background In Transition states will not be changed. The automatically set
states can be de-selected by the user before the transition is made.

Example
The advanced state is extremely useful for situations where the user wants a source always
to have a Keyer active, for example a remote source which always has a “SAM” bug included
in the picture.
Select M/E1 in the menu table. If the remote source is Xpt 1 and the bug is set up on Key 1 on
M/E1, the user would need to go into the Advanced menu and select Xpt1 as the crosspoint
and ME1 in the enables.
Touch {Add} {Key1} in the “On Select/Reselect” control
Touch {Key1} in the On Deselect control
Touch {Transition} to light this control.
Every time the remote source is put on the output of ME1 the “SAM” bug will be included the
picture.
Note: Re-selecting a source which is already on the Program or Bgnd A/B Buses will reapply the
appropriate In Transition rules. This could be useful if the rules are inadvertently changed,
for instance, by adding another Key to the transition.

12.10.2 Key Priority

The “in front” / “behind” position of each of the four Keyers is decided by the Priority control.
The Key priority is changed by the {Up}/{Down} buttons. Select a Key using the Key On/Off
buttons, then as the user presses the Up/Down buttons the green bars will change position,
indicating that the selected Key priority has changed.
If a MAV Trans is being used, the priority can also be changed. By default the MAV Trans is
always on top.
12.10.3 Selecting a Type of Key Using Key Control

The type of Keying required is selected by touching one of the menu link buttons in the Keyer.
Full - The Fill is a full layer over the background hiding it completely.
Linear - Selects a linear Key.
Luma- Selects a luma Key.
Chroma - Selects chroma Key.
Invert - Inverts the Key signal so that the parts, which were Keyed off, become Keyed on and
vice versa.
Coupled key - (Latching) Uses the Fill and Key sources allocated to the crosspoint.
Split Key - (Momentary) Allows the Fill and Key sources to be split across two different
crosspoints. The Fill is selected on the Key bus in the normal manner. The Key source is that
allocated to the crosspoint selected on the Key bus with the Split Key button pressed and held
down. When in Dual Tile Mode the Xpt selection for each tile can either be done using the
Split key button or pressing the OLED Bus Select button.
Self Key - (Latching) In Coupled Key mode Self Key causes the Key, as well as the Fill, to be
derived from the Fill source allocated to the crosspoint, also known as a Video Key.
In Split Key mode Video Key causes the Key to be derived from the Fill source of the
crosspoint used as the split away.
Pvw Key - Previews the Key and Fill individually.

12.10.4 Other Key Control Functions
DVE - This turns on the DVE function. When entering the DVE menu, the DVE function will be
enabled.
Mask - This enables the Preset Mask option. When entering the Preset Mask function, it will
be enabled ready to use.

12.10.5 Linear and Luma Keying

The Linear and Luma Keyer menus look similar. They each have independent sets of lift level,
gain and opacity controls. The exception being the Shaping parameter in the Luma Keyer.
Lift - sets the luma level at which the Key operates.
Gain - affects the sharpness of the lift point.
Opacity - controls how transparent the Key is.
Shaping - stops dark edges appearing around a Keyed source (anti-aliasing).
Over Range - Kula expects a video range Key of 64 to 940, the video range Key is used
internally throughout the system.
If an external CG Key generator is providing a “full range” external Key of 4 to 1019, this
would be classed as technically illegal video.
In this situation, the Over Range parameter can be used to bring the full range of a Key back
within the video range Key levels.
When using sources that are not pre-Keyed, such as those from a camera, the Key cut signal
is generated from the video signal using lift and gain controls. The portions of the signal that
are greater in luminance than the lift level cut the hole in the background.
The Key lift and gain levels are user adjustable. The Fill may be the same source as the Key
or from a different source, or matte generator.
Note: When only one source is used for both Fill and Key, the Key is sometimes called a Self Key
or a Video Key.

12.11 Box Mask

Box mask uses a mask shape to mask away the Key Layer revealing the Background layer.
In the “Mask” attacher shown in the diagram below, select “Box”.
Invert - inverts the background through the Key Layer
Box Mask Mode - selects between the Preset Masks and the Box Mask
Softness - this option softens the outside edge of the Mask
Top, Bottom, Left, Right - using the parameters, this function will mask each side of the Key
Layer individually. Use the On/Off buttons shown in the parameters to switch the Mask
On/Off.

12.12 Chroma Keying
12.12.1 Chroma Keying Overview

In chroma Keying the Key Cut signal is derived from color rather than level. A particular color
of a picture is keyed away to the background leaving the other colors visible over the
background. The transparent color is user selectable and may be a range of colors or a single
color. There are various controls to reduce fringing and other artifacts from appearing in the
composite picture.
Kula has a high quality Chroma Keyer on each Key on each available M/E (not on DSKs).
Chroma Keying can be used in both the Keying of graphics and live pictures. When Keying
graphics, the set up of the Chroma Keyer will be quick and straight forward. This is because
the Keyed area is easier to control in a 2D environment.
Keying for a live or moving environments is usually more involved and requires additional
work as it is more difficult to control color and light.
12.12.2 Achieving good results

The main factor in setting up a good Chroma Key in a live environment is a well lit Key and
subject. The Key (usually Blue or Green screen) should be highly saturated and even in tone.
The lighting of the subject should highlight while aiming to limit the amount of Key color
(sometimes resulting in 'spill') reflecting onto the subject. The subject should avoid like colors
to the Key color to avoid break-up in the fill. In addition, appropriate and consistent camera
setup will be important. The user should also ensure that the Chroma Key is set up for any
camera movements and changes in picture.
12.12.3 Using the Chroma Key Menus

To setup the Chroma Key feature quickly and easily, follow the stages listed in the following
pages. Before starting to chroma key, ensure that the source material has been loaded into a
Store and the Store has been selected on the required Key Bus. Then on the control surface,
select the following:
• The Key that has the source material,
• The {Chroma} and {Self Key} are enabled (for normal keying).
As shown in the diagram below.

In the Keyer main menu press the {Chroma Keyer...} menu link button to enter the Chroma
Keyer “Main” menu.
The Chroma Keyer - Main menu is the default menu, the chroma keyer has been designed
so that the majority of chroma keying can be accomplished within this menu with just a couple
of adjustments. The Basic and Advanced menus should only need to be used with
particularly hard to chroma key source material.
12.12.4 Chroma Keyer - Main Menu

As mentioned earlier, the Chroma Key - Main menu is designed to tackle a majority of
chroma key source material. Most of the required adjustments to make a very good chroma
key can be made in this menu.
The Green, Blue and Red “Presets” buttons are where the user should start to chroma key.
The presets will achieve a good chroma key for the majority of good quality source material.
The Preset controls have been engineered around a number of different chroma key material.
The levels are then averaged out to give a good chroma key across the whole range of
material used.

At this stage it is a good idea to work through a couple of chroma key examples; describing
the setup and parameter adjustments, and then finally describing all the other parameter
controls within the chroma key menu structures.
Example 1
Note: When starting to setup a chroma key, before making any adjustments, press the {Normal}
button to normalize all the parameter controls. This is because the current default GMEM
may be a user-defined default GMEM, not a factory default GMEM.
Note: Setup the chroma key on the preview (PVW) monitor so that if necessary, the color picker
cursor can be displayed.
The chroma key source material used is shown below, this will be keyed over a flower field
background.
Touch the {Green} Presets button and the source material will be chroma keyed over the
selected background.
It is as easy as that!

If the subject being chroma keyed has a hard edge (a hard dark/light edge) around it, adjust
the Clean Edge - Key Size parameter in a negative direction, which will shrink the Key Size
horizontally in steps as shown in the menu below.

Example 2
If the Presets Green/ Blue did not achieve the desired result, there is a second method to
setup the chroma key using the background color picker.
With the source material on the PVW monitor, press the {Cursor & Preview Fill} button. This
will bring the chroma picker cursor onto the PVW monitor.
A Chroma Keyer will have a control to select the color, hue, needed to generate the Key. This
is the Background/Foreground Color Picker. The color picker cursor allows the user to take
samples of the Background and Foreground. The color picker is used by the chroma keyer to
set the key and chroma acceptance angles. Touch the Cursor X/Y attacher and the cursor
can be moved around the monitor using the joystick on the control surface. Rotating the top of
the joystick will increase/decrease the size of the cursor, allowing a greater or narrower
sample area to be taken. Select a section of the green screen background that has an even
color and press the Pick Background - {Add} button to take a background sample.
Press the {Cursor & Preview Key} button to display the Key signal. If there is any
background breaking through into the key signal other than the subject being chroma keyed
then move the cursor over the affected area and press the Pick Background - {Add} button
once again. The key signal will have a clean background.
If the subject being keyed has any breakthrough then a Foreground Pick will be needed.
Move the cursor over the affected area and touch the Pick Foreground {Add} button.

Press the {Cursor & Preview Key} button once again to change the PVW monitor from the
Key signal to the chroma key source over the background.
As with example 1, if the subject being chroma keyed has a hard edge (a hard dark/light
edge) around it, adjust the Clean Edge - Key Size parameter in a negative direction, which
will shrink the Key Size horizontally in steps.
Only source material that is particularly difficult to chroma key will need further parameter
adjustments made on top of what has already been described.

12.12.5 Chroma Keyer Main Menu

The two examples have shown that with just a few adjustments a good chroma key can be
achieved. The next step is to describe the menus functionality in more detail.
Pick Color - this sets the Hue, Saturation and Luminance automatically. Key and Chroma
Acceptance angles will also be set. Allows the user to select areas of the background and
foreground to remove any unwanted breakthrough.
Pick Background and Foreground buttons:
• Add - will add the selected area inside the cursor to the color picker
• Remove - will remove one color pick at a time from the color pick display
• Clear - will clear all color picks from the display
Preview Output Only:

Cursor & Preview Fill - with the chroma key source on a preview monitor, pressing this
button will display the Fill portion of the chroma key without the selected background.
Cursor & Preview Key - with the chroma key source on a preview monitor, pressing this
button will display the Key portion of the chroma key without the selected background.
Cursor & Preview Fill Cursor & Preview Key

Clean Edges is a key size control. It allows the user to adjust the edge around the material
that is being chroma keyed.
Key Size - will shrink or grow the key edge horizontally left or right in steps
Size Bias - this adjusts which side of the key edge is adjusted
Soften - applies a blur to the edge of the key (which edge depends on the Size Bias
adjustment).
Transparent/Key Accept Angle - if opened wide enough allows foreground objects to

become transparent. The lower the accept angle the less transparent the object being keyed
is. In this way Key Accept Angle is also a transparency control.
Spill/Chroma Accept Angle - if the chroma acceptance angle is set narrow, say 60 degrees.
The this will remove the backing color from an object being chroma keyed, but the spill will
remain on the foreground object. If the angle is increased to 200 degrees then spill on the
foreground object is also removed. If too much angle is applied then the foreground object
color is incorrect. In this way Chroma Accept Angle is also a spill control.
The Green and Blue Presets were designed to quickly chroma key good source material
where the green or blue backgrounds are a consistent color and the object being chroma
keyed has been taken from a good camera source.
The preset levels have been taken from a number of good quality source material clips and
stills and will work with the majority of chroma key material.
If the Green preset button is pressed for example, the Key/Chroma Accept Angles will always
be the same for any material being chroma keyed (Key Accept = 119.88 deg and Chroma
Accept = 195.12 deg) as shown in the diagram below.
Note: If any Background/Foreground color picking is done after using the Presets then the default
Accept Angles are changed.

12.12.6 Chroma Keyer Basic Menu

This menu should be used if the source material is particularly hard to chroma key and
requires more precise adjustment.
Note: The Background/Foreground Picker and Clean Edges menus have the same functionality
as in the “Main” menu.
Clip - sets the overall brightness of the Key Layer. Adjust the Clip parameter to fill in any
transparency in the background or foreground image.
Gain - sets the hardness of the edges between the key and the fill, by adjusting the contrast
of the key. It can be used to show or mask fine detail at the edges of the foreground. Setting
this too high will lead to hard edges to your key.
Chroma Accept Angle - this defines what colors (outside of the dotted lines in the Chroma
clock) are re-mapped towards the colors along the chroma accept angle. It is important that
this is at least the width of the Key Accept Angle. Adjust this parameter to remove as much of
the spill as possible, however opening this too wide will modify the foreground color (as they
are remapped).
Key Accept Angle - This sets the angle value of the range of colors to be keyed out. E.g., if it
is required to key out green (hue 120) and yellow (hue 60) the Hue control should be set to 90
and the key accept angle to 60, i.e., + & - 30 on the Hue of 90 to give 60 and 120. If this is not
set correctly the key window will include not enough or too many colors.
Chroma Suppression - sets the amount suppression applied to the unwanted colors in the
keyed signal. The Chroma Suppression needs to be set to minimum value with no color in the
background. If the image has areas of transparency or semi transparency, touch the Chroma
Suppression attacher and adjust the controls for optimum results to remove any residual
background color from the image.
Opacity - this controls the opacity of the Key
The Clip and Gain control of these parameters adjust the clipping level for the blacks
(shadows) area of the signal.

Highlights - reduce the main chroma key in areas of bright foreground luma. This is achieved
by subtracting the highlight lift from foreground luma and multiplying that by the highlight gain.
Multiply this result by the main chroma key and subtract only the positives to the main chroma
key again thereby reducing it.
Lowlights - reduce the main chroma key in areas of dark foreground luma. This is achieved
by subtracting the lowlight lift from foreground luma and multiplying that by the lowlight gain.
Multiply this result by the main chroma key and add only the negatives to the main chroma
key again thereby reducing it.

12.12.7 Chroma Key Advanced Menu

Again, this menu would be used for a more advanced setup of a chroma key.
Hue - Selects the color to be made transparent by setting it to the appropriate hue angle. If a
range of color is required, Hue is set to the centre value of the range.
Luminance - This sets the luma value of the color to be keyed out.
Saturation - This sets the saturation level of the color to be keyed out. If this is not set
correctly the colors of the signal showing through the key will not be right.
Chroma Accept Angle - this defines what colors (outside of the dotted lines in the Chroma
clock) are re-mapped towards the colors along the chroma accept angle. It is important that
this is at least the width of the Key Accept Angle. Adjust this parameter to remove as much of
the spill as possible, however opening this too wide will modify the foreground color (as they
are remapped)
Chroma Suppression - this defines the range of colors (within the dotted lines within the
chroma clock) that get suppressed to Gray. The Chroma Keyer will de-saturate the spill area
to Gray, as it is harder for the eye to recognize compared to a bright Blue or Green halo.
Adjust this parameter to reduce the Gray outline and get the best possible results.
Luma Suppression - sets the amount of suppression applied to the luma content of the
keyed signal.
Luma Compensation - is used to adjust the for the level of transparency.
Luma Coring - this adjusts the luma level included in the Key signal by modifying the Key
acceptance area in relation to the luminance levels.
Chroma Coring - this adjusts the colors included in the Key signal by modifying the Key
acceptance area in relation to the Hue angle.

12.13 Preset Masks

Preset Masks allow the Key Layer to be masked; they do this by using a pattern to key
through to the background layer. There are two Preset Mask options, both are identical in
operation and both can be applied to a single Key Layer.
Each mask has arrows identifying which direction the mask will be adjusted using the
parameter level controls.
Use the Pattern parameter to select a mask or by touching the appropriate pattern on the
GUI, a red square will appear around the mask.
Notice the box directly below the mask menu. When a mask is selected this box will display
parameters that denote how the mask can be adjusted. Touch this box and a set of
adjustment parameters will appear on the right of the menu.

12.13.1 Parameter Controls
Mask Enable - enables the Preset Mask
Invert - inverts the mask leaving the background visible within the preset mask pattern
Mask Mode - select between Preset and Box masks.
Preset Mask mode:
Pattern - scrolls through the masks available
Level - controls the amount of mask wipe
Softness - makes the edge of the mask soft
X Position - moves the center of certain masks in the horizontal direction
Y Position - moves the center of certain masks in the vertical direction
Rotation - Rotates certain masks. The rotation parameter displays the rotation in degrees,
and the amount of rotations made.
Aspect Ratio - varies the aspect ratio of the mask

12.14 DVE
The DVE parameters allow the user to position and size a Key Layer, add a Border around a
Key Layer or Crop a Key Layer.
When enabled the DVE can be set to manipulate a Single or Dual Tile (which will be
explained later in this section).
The user can choose which source they wish to manipulate using the “Crosspoint” parameter.
Touch the Popup button to select Xpt, Matte, M/E output or Stores.
12.14.1 Position & Size

The Position & Size attacher area, allows the user to move a Key Layer around the screen
and to zoom in/out.
X/Y Position - Parameters are used to move the position of the Key Layer around the monitor
screen as shown below.
Y Position
X Position X Position
Y Position

Zoom - Parameter is used to zoom the Key Layer in and out.
12.14.2 Crop
The crop menu as it suggests allows the user to crop the Key Layer, and also allows the user
to apply soft edges.
Cropping On/Off - Switches the crop facility On or Off,
Top, Bottom, Left and Right - Crops the Fill edges
Bottom Crop
Original Key Layer

Top Crop
Left Crop Right Crop

12.14.3 Border
This function allows the user to apply a border and effects around a Key Layer.
Border On/Off - Switches the Border On or Off
Border Fill - Selects source for the border fill from a Matte selected using the Matte Selector
parameters, Util 1 or Util 2
Border Width - Adjusts the overall width of the border
Softness - Softens the outside edges of the border
Original Key Layer
Border Applied Changed Border Fill
Border Width Adjusted
The Matte Selector and Hue, Luma and Sat parameters are used to adjust the color of the
border around a Key Layer when the option is selected in the Border Fill parameter. The user
is able to select one of 16 preset Mattes, or create a user-defined color for the border using
the Hue, Luma and Sat parameters.
Matte Selector - Selects the preset Mattes 1 to 16 or a Local Matte that allows the user to
create a their own border color.
Matte Hue, Luma and Sat - These parameters allow the user to adjusts the Hue, Luma and
Saturation levels of the Local Matte. The user is able to create their own unique border color
around a Key Layer.

12.15 Dual Tile

This function allows you to take an existing Key Layer and create 2 Tiles (Key Layers) that
can be independently resized (Zoom), moved along the XY axis, and cropped.
The Dual Tile mode will now give:
• 4 Keys per M/E that can now be used as 8 Tiles
• You will also have 2 Keys per SME. Key1 has dual tile functionality, allowing an
SME to now have two tiles.
The Dual Tile mode is easy to setup and easy to use. To use this function, bring a Key Layer
onto a monitor and use “Dual Tile” On, then select “Tile 1” in the Key Control area of the
control panel to Zoom down the Key Layer.
Note: When in Dual Tile Mode the Xpt selection for each tile can either be done using the {Split
Key} button or pressing the OLED Bus Select button.
M/E1 Key 1 Over

a background

12.15.1 Dual Tile Menu

With a Key Layer on the monitor, make sure that the “DVE” parameter is turned “On” and then
select “Tiles” Dual. Notice that the menu is split in two “Tile One” and “Tile Two”.
Note: At this point you will only be able to see one tile, the other is underneath.
Use the “Top Tile” parameter to swap around the tile priority, the bottom tile becomes the top.
The parameter controls for Tiles 1 and 2 are exactly the same. The parameters for Tile 1 will
be described in this section.
Use the “Crosspoint” attacher to select the source for Tile 1. This can be a Xpt source, Matte,
M/E, or Store.
12.15.2 Tile 1 Position & Size

and to zoom in/out.user-defined
X/Y Position - Parameters are used to move the position of the Key Layer around the monitor
screen.

12.15.3 Tile 1 Crop

The crop menu as it suggests allows the user to crop the Key Layer, and also allows the user
Cropping On/Off - Switches the crop facility On or Off, press the On/Off buttons in the
parameter control area of the menu.
12.15.4 Tile 1 Border

This function allows the user to apply a border and effects around a Key Layer.
parameters, Util 1/Util 2.

border around a Key Layer when the option is selected in the Border Fill parameter. The user
create a their own border color.
Matte Hue, Luma and Sat - These parameters allow the user to adjust the Hue, Luma and
Saturation levels of the Local Matte, the user is able to create their own unique border color
around a Key Layer.
12.15.5 Moving the two tiles so that both can be seen

The two tiles are controlled using the Tile Position & Size parameters. Using the XY
parameters for Tile 1, the tile will move as expected and move away from Tile 2.
Tile One
Tile Two
Note: If you use the “Main” Position & Size; XY or Zoom parameters, both of the tiles will move
together.

12.16 Color Correction - Key Bus

Key Bus color correction allows the user to color correct a selected Key.
To use Color Correction, touch the {Color FX...} menu link button.
12.16.0.1 YUV
be adjusted.
YUV attacher.

12.16.0.2 Bleed
• Red into Red
• Blue into Blue
12.16.0.3 RGB
where the:

12.16.0.4 Presets
adjustments.
black and white.
recalled.

12.16.0.5 Curves
The Curves function is used to artistic type effect to the selected Key Bus. The user can
select preset effects such as Solarize and Posterize, and then adjust them to give a

12.17 SME Setup

SME or Sub M/E in simple terms is another form of M/E with slightly less functionality and
depending on the system purchased, there will 1 or 2 SMEs available to use. Delegating an
SME on the control surface is done in the same way as delegating an M/E, using the toggle
buttons to step through the M/Es and SME, and the OLED button to select the SME.
Toggle buttons
OLED button to select the SME
An SME has 2 Keys, one with DVE functionality, so it also has “Dual Tile” functionality as well,
and one without.
SME Keys have all the same menu structure for Background and Key Transitions, Key Setup,
Chroma Keyer, Preset Masks and DVE (Key 1 only) as a full M/E.
For an explanation about the parameter controls, please see the M/E Setup section at the
start of this chapter.

12.17.1 SME - Key 1 DVE Rotation

There is one function that Key 1 on an SME has that is different to the M/E Keyers. This is
called “Rotation”. The parameters will rotate a Key Layer on an X/Y axis, change the angle,
adjust perspective and move the vanishing point of the Key Layer.
Some examples of the DVE Rotation effects on a Key Layer
Angle Rotate X (positive)
Angle Rotate X (negative)

Angle Rotate Y (positive)
Angle - this adjusts the movement of the Key Layer in a positive or negative way on an X or Y
axis
Rotate - this selects the X or Y axis for the angle adjustment
Perspective - this will move the perspective point on the Key Layer
Vanishing Point - in Tile mode, the vanishing point is placed on the center of the Key Layer,
so the dimensions of the Key Layer will always be the same wherever it is placed in the
viewing area. Selecting Screen will give a more true 3D DVE effect and will naturally distort
the Key Layer as it is moved around the viewing area.
Position X/Y - this affects the sheering of the Key Layer, by giving the effect of moving the
camera position.

12.18 DSK
Down Stream Keys (DSK) are an extra 4 Key Layers that can be used. In general, logos and
text are generated by DSK. This function allows you to keep Key or text displayed while
switching sources on the background.
12.18.1 DSK Setup

There are 4 DSKs available to use on Kula. By default 1 DSK is available to use immediately.
The others are switched on in the Engineering Config - Output Setup menu.
When the user select DSK 2 - 4 this will change the 6 Bi-direction Inputs/Outputs into Inputs
only. Outputs 13 to 18 are the “Bi-directional” Inputs/Outputs. By default, they are outputs but
when using the DSK selection buttons, the following happens:
• Selecting 2 DSKs - Makes O/P 17/18 into Inputs (2M/E mainframe I/P 37 and I/P 38)
(1M/E mainframe I/P 19 and I/P 20).
• Selecting 3 DSKs - Makes O/P 15, 16, 17 and 18 into Inputs (2M/E mainframe I/P 37,
38, 39 and 40) (1M/E mainframe I/P 19, 20, 21 and 22).
• Selecting 4 DSKs - Makes O/P 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 into Inputs (2M/E main-
frame I/P 37, 38, 39, 40, 41 and 42) (1M/E mainframe I/P 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 and 24).

Once the DSKs have been selected, the user then has to switch them on in the User Config -
Aux Output Setup menu.
In the menu above, DSK1 has been switched On, on the Preview Output. The next thing to do
is to select DSK 1 on the control surface. This is done using the “Delegate” toggle buttons to
scroll down to DSK1 and then press the OLED button to select the DSK.
Toggle Buttons
DSK 1
OLED Select Button
Once the source is selected on the DSK crosspoint Bus, the DSK can be viewed in two ways;
directly on the (in this example) Preview output, or on the preview output on the Multiviewer,
which will have to be set to “Output” in the following way:

In the User Config - Multiviewer Tiles menu, switch the “Content” parameter to Output, then
use the “Output” parameter popup to select the output (BNC) that the preview output is routed
to.
12.18.2 DSK Setup Menu
12.18.3 Linear and Luma DSK

The Linear and Luma DSK menus look similar. They each have independent sets of lift level,
gain and opacity controls. The exception being the Shaping parameter in the Luma DSK.
Full - The Fill is a full layer over the background hiding it completely.
Linear - Selects a linear DSK.
Luma- Selects a luma DSK.
Lift - sets the luma level at which the Key operates.
Gain - affects the sharpness of the lift point.
Opacity - controls how transparent the DSK is.
Shaping - stops dark edges appearing around a Keyed source (anti-aliasing).
Over Range - Kula expects a video range Key of 64 to 940. The video range Key is used
internally throughout the system.
If an external CG Key generator is providing a “full range” external DSK of 4 to 1019, this
would be classed as technically illegal video.
In this situation, the Over Range parameter can be used to bring the full range of a Key back
within the video range DSK levels.
When using sources that are not pre-Keyed, such as those from a camera, the DSK cut signal
is generated from the video signal using lift and gain controls. The portions of the signal that
are greater in luminance than the lift level cut the hole in the background.
The DSK lift and gain levels are user adjustable. The Fill may be the same source as the Key
or from a different source, or matte generator.

12.18.4 DSK DVE

The DVE parameters allow the user to position and size a DSK layer, add a Border around a
DSK layer or Crop a Key Layer.
When enabled the DVE can be set to manipulate a Single or Dual Tile (which will be
explained later in this section).
The user can choose which source they wish to manipulate using the “Crosspoint” parameter.
Touch the Popup button to select Xpt, Matte, M/E output or Stores.
12.18.5 Position & Size

and to zoom in/out.
X/Y Position - Parameters are used to move the position of the DSK layer around the monitor
screen as shown above.
Zoom - Parameter is used to zoom the DSK layer in and out.

12.18.6 Crop
The crop menu as it suggests allows the user to crop the DSK layer, and also allows the user
Cropping On/Off - Switches the crop facility On or Off. Press the On/Off buttons in the

12.18.7 Border
This function allows the user to apply a border and effects around a DSK layer.
parameters, Util 1 or Util 2.
border around a DSK layer when the option is selected in the Border Fill parameter. The user
create their own border color.
Matte Hue, Luma and Sat - These parameters allow the user to adjusts the Hue, Luma and
Saturation levels of the Local Matte. The user is able to create their own unique border color
around a DSK layer.

12.19 Dual Tile

This function allows you to take an existing DSK layer and create 2 Tiles (DSK Layers) that
can be independently resized (Zoom), moved along the XY axis, and cropped.
The Dual Tile mode will now give:
• 2 DSK Tiles per DSK that can now be used as a total of 4 DSK Tiles.
The Dual Tile mode is easy to setup and easy to use. To use this function, bring a Key Layer
onto a monitor and use “Dual Tile” On, then select “Tile 1” in the menu to Zoom down the
DSK

12.19.1 Dual Tile Menu

With a DSK layer on the monitor, make sure that the “DVE” parameter is turned “On”, and
then select “Tiles” Dual.
Note: At this point you will only be able to see one tile, the other is underneath.
Use the “Top Tile” parameter to swap around the tile priority. The bottom tile becomes the top.
The parameter controls for Tiles 1 and 2 are exactly the same, to the parameters for Tile 1 will
be described in this section.
Use the “Crosspoint” attacher to select the source for Tile 1. This can be a Xpt source, Matte,
M/E, or Store.
12.19.2 Tile 1 Position & Size

The Position & Size attacher allows the user to move a DSK layer around the screen and to
zoom in/out.
X/Y Position - Parameters are used to move the position of the DSK layer around the monitor
screen.

12.19.3 Tile 1 Crop

The crop menu as it suggests allows the user to crop the DSK layer, and also allows the user
Cropping On/Off - Switches the crop facility On or Off. Press the On/Off buttons in the
12.19.4 Tile 1 Border

This function allows the user to apply a border and effects around a DSK layer.
parameters, Util 1/Util 2.

border around a DSK layer when the option is selected in the Border Fill parameter. The user
create their own border color.
Matte Hue, Luma and Sat - These parameters allow the user to adjust the Hue, Luma and
Saturation levels of the Local Matte.The user is able to create their own unique border color
around a Key Layer.
12.19.5 Moving the two tiles so that both can be seen

The two tiles are controlled using the Tile Position & Size parameters. Using the XY
parameters for Tile 1, the tile will move as expected and move away from Tile 2.
Note: If you use the “Main” Position & Size; XY or Zoom parameters, both of the tiles will move
together.

13. Effects Memories
13.1 Effects Dissolve

The Dissolve function gives a means of providing a smooth transition from one memory state
to another by interpolating any variable values (i.e. size, position, border width, etc.). Any
state-change variables (e.g. button pushes) can be set to change at the start or end of the
dissolve and provides a simple way of creating a two key-frame effect.
The Effects Dissolve function can be used on Global Memories (GMEM), ME Memories
(DMEM), DVE Memories, Snapshots and User Config. memories.
An Effects Dissolve can be applied to an existing saved memory, or to a memory file as it is
saved with a new effect, using the “Shortcuts” menu. Editing an existing memory file in the
Filing System (e.g. GMEM, DMEM and Snapshot). The effects that can be made are only
limited to the creativity of the user.
Used when creating a Dissolve

Effect
Filing System used when editing an existing file to create a Dissolve

Effect

13.1.1 Saving an Effects Dissolve with a DMEM

This example explains how to save a Dissolve effect with a DMEM, but the same Dissolve
effect can be saved with a GMEM.
Create an effect; for example a one box key layer On then Off. Touch the “Effects Dissolve”
{Enable} button, then touch the “M/E” or “Sub Mix” button. The user can now adjust the
Effects Dissolve Duration, Shape and Profile by touching the Effects Dissolve attacher, then
use the parameter controls on the right. Give the DMEM a number, then press the {Save}
button to save the DMEM
When the DMEM is recalled, the dissolve effect will dissolve the Key layer on and off.
The DMEM load sequence can then be recorded to a Macro and attached to one of the Macro
buttons on the control surface.
As the Dissolve Effect runs, the top corner of the menu (marked in the menu above), will
display a Dissolve “percentage”. The percentage number from will run from 0% to 100% for
each dissolve effect created. A {Stop} button next to the percentage number, cause the
current running dissolve effect to stop.
Dissolve Effects Parameter Controls
Cut Point
• Auto - the switcher determines the most useful point for state-change variables to be
changed, i.e. at the start or end of the dissolve. States which are switching on will
change at the start of the dissolve and those which are switching off will change at the
end of the dissolve.
• Early - Changes the state of all state-change variables at the start of the dissolve
• Late - Changes the state of all state-change variables at the end of the dissolve
Duration - Sets the overall duration of the dissolve
Shape - Controls the shape of the chosen dissolve profile
Profile - Sets the profile of the dissolve path allowing a linear change or smooth acceleration
/ deceleration (among other options). A graphical illustration of the dissolve path is shown at
the bottom of the pop-up and shows the selected shape and profile.

13.1.2 Applying a Dissolve Effect to an existing DMEM

If a dissolve is required on a memory which has not already been set as a dissolve, this can
be achieved by switching on the Dissolve button.
Select an existing DMEM from the file list, then touch the {Dissolve} button. The Effects
Dissolve dialog box will appear, so that the user can set the type of effect required. When
finished, touch the {Apply} button.
Notice that the file now has an “X” next to the DMEM number to signify that it has a dissolve
effect applied.
If a Dissolve is not wanted, but the file has been saved with on, this can temporarily be
inhibited during a load by touching and holding the “Dissolve” button in the “Shortcuts” menu,
it changes to a red the “alert” color.

13.2 DMEM’s
What is a DMEM
A DMEM or Dynamic Memory, saves set-up information related to a single M/E, which may
contain information such as:
• Color Effects
DMEM’s are Stored within a user-defined Project. The user can save up to 1000 DMEM’s
within a single Project.
With the defined Project selected, the Filing System menu allows the user to enter the
DMEM filing system where the user is able to Load or Delete selected DMEM’s, Export
DMEM’s to external memory devices or view detailed contents within the DMEM.
From this menu, the user can also create an “Effects Dissolve” as described in the previous
section.

Another feature in the DMEM menu is “Copy To Button” this allows the user to assign a
DMEM Load button to a user defined button on the control surface. I gives the access to a
DMEM “Quick Load” function for the selected DMEM in the table in the DMEM menu.
Touch the {Copy To Button}, the button and the {Paste Clone} button will flash green
indicating that the button info is ready to be copied to a button. A dialog box is displayed with
button options when pasting to a button on the control surface.
Active Functions
Clone Function - switches the clone function On/Off
Normal Function- switches the normal function of a button On/Off.
These can be selected together so that both functions are active.
Lamp From:
Clone - will set the button lamp to light up the same as the cloned function, i.e. if live to air the
button will turn Red.
Normal - switches the lamp between its normal Green color and the Red cloned color
Bitmap From
Clone - displays a bitmap from the cloned function
Macro/SS - by default, a User Function Button would be blank normally, however the button
can also have a bitmap from a macro or snap shot.
Snapshot Save
Inhibit - inhibits the user function buttons ability to record a snapshot.
Allow - allows a user function button to save a snapshot

13.2.1 Enables
The “Enables” list of buttons, to the right of the files table, allows the user to select or
de-select functions that can be loaded with a file.
If the tab next to the enables button is green, this means that the function was included when
the file was originally saved. If the tab is gray, the function is not included when the file was
originally saved. If an enabled function is selected (green), when the config is saved, the
function will be included in the saved config.

13.3 GMEM’s
What is a GMEM
A GMEM or Global Memory will save set-up information relating to multiple M/E’s. A GMEM
saves all the same information as DMEM’s with the added ability to save Stores and
Configurations:
• Color Effects
• Stores
• User Config
A GMEM can save all of the above as a complete snapshot of the entire system setup.
GMEM’s are saved within a user-defined Project, which can be viewed in the Filing System
menu allowing the user to enter the GMEM filing system where the user is able to Load or
Delete selected GMEM’s, Export GMEM’s to external memory devices or view detailed
contents within the GMEM.

13.4 Macros
Macros can be assigned to any button on the control surface. When macros are assigned to
the Macro Buttons on the control surface they can have an associated “bitmap” added to an
mnemonic display.
Kula macros are recorded in real time. This means that macros record functions behind
buttons, rather than just the button press. This allows creation of simple multi-button
operations to complex effects and transitions, which include; Pbus, GPOs, DMEM, and
GMEM loading, clip playing and VDCP.
13.4.1 Setting Up Macros
Macros are saved in Filing System - Macros, which in-turn are saved into Projects in the
Filing System. The buttons functions are assigned within the Panel Config. Although the
macros themselves are run and activated in the mainframe the buttons are associated with
the Panel Config.
As mentioned earlier, macros are recorded as a sequence of button presses in real time,
which in turn are translated into a sequence of actions. The delay between these functions
(button presses) can be tested and edited once the recording is completed. Once a macro is
running if it is run a second time halfway through the macro run sequence, it will instantly start
from the beginning.
Note: A Menu Operation is not recorded as a macro but any direct action within menus will be
(e.g. a Pbus trigger).

13.5 Macro Record
Macro Ready Macro

To Record Recording
To start recording a macro press {Macro Record} button on the GUI panel. This button will
now go Green indicating a macro is ready to start recording. The macro recording and button
delays will only be activated after the first function (button press) has been entered. Once the
macro recording has started the {Macro Record} button will go Red. While recording a macro
different menus on the GUI can be entered to gain access to any menu-related functions.
Once the macro is completed press the {Macro Record} button again and this will end the
macro and the button to an unlit state.
The button press sequence that was recorded in the macro is displayed in the Macro Actions
table (shown above). Press the {Test Macro} button to test the macro just recorded.
13.5.1 Pausing a Macro Record Sequence

A Macro can be paused once a record sequence has started. Whilst a Macro is being
recorded the {Macro Record} button is Red. Press and hold the {Macro Record} button and
it will turn Orange indicating that it is Paused. At this point the Button Delay timer is also
paused.
Press the {Macro Record} button once. The button will turn Red and the record process will
start once again.
Note: While a macro is paused, Kula can still run multiple other macros at the same time
13.5.2 Appending more Macro Actions to a Macro Sequence

Additional macro actions can be added to a previously recorded macro sequence. In the
{Edit…} menu, move the highlight bar to the position above where the action is going to be
inserted, and then press and hold the {Macro Record} button. Again the button will turn Red
and the record sequence will start. When finished press the {Macro Record} button again to
stop recording, and the macro sequence will be added below the highlight bar.

13.5.3 Macro Test and Edit
13.5.4 Test Macro

Once the macro has been recorded, to test and edit the actions, press the [MACRO] button
on the GUI to enter the Macro - Edit menu. If a macro has just been recorded, the
functions/actions that have just been recorded are displayed in the Macro Actions table. To
replay/test a macro, press the {Test Macro} button.
13.5.5 Pause Macro

A macro action sequence can be paused at any selected point, There are two ways to do this.
Either use the Action parameter to select a specific point in the action sequence and press
{Pause}, or press the {Test Macro} button to run the macro sequence and then press
{Pause}, at the required point. The next time the Test Macro is run, the macro will pause
when it reaches the chosen point.
13.5.6 Wait Until Loaded

Wait Until Loaded function will make the macro pause until the file operation is complete.
'Wait' can only be turned on for file operations. Waiting macros which get a re-trigger will
behave exactly as if they were paused (i.e. they will stop waiting).

13.5.7 Ripple Action Delay

Allows an Action Delay that has been set, to be “Rippled” through all Actions in the table
from that point onwards.
Pressing the {Ripple Delay} button will pop up a Macro Ripple Delay dialog box.
Ripple To Start button will ripple the current delay value to all previous Actions up as far as
the first Action in the table
Ripple To End button will ripple a delay from current action to all Actions until the last action
Ripple All button will set all Actions to current delay, and Cancel will cancel the Ripple delay
request.

13.5.8 Attacher and Parameter Controls

Use Delays - this function turns the real-time button press delays On or Off.
Follow ME - this function will overwrite the M/E upon which the macro had been saved, and
instead will assign itself to the ME that is selected in the Dynamic Mix Effect area.
This means that a macro that mixes Key 2 on, that had been saved using M/E1 Key 2, can be
used on M/E2 Key 2 as long as M/E2 is selected.
Action Deleted - this will delete a selected Macro Action.
Use Button Delay - this will allow a delay to be added to the Normal function of the button, so
the macro will act and then the Normal function will take place.
Disable Button - this option will disable a button’s original function and only allow the button
to enable the macro that is assigned to it

13.5.9 Offline Macro Editor

The offline macro editor is a clear, simple and quick way to create new macros or edit existing
macros whilst the production switcher control surface is being used to produce a show.
The offline macro editor has an intuitive menu structure with all the elements at hand to build
the most complicated macros, without having to go though other menus or having to record
button presses on the control surface, all within one menu.
Once a macro has been created, the delay between the macro actions, pauses and ripple
delay can be edited then tested.
13.5.9.1 Offline Macro Edit Menu
As mentioned above, the Macro Edit menu is the only menu that the user needs to use to
create new macros or edit existing menus offline (while the control surface is being used).
The diagram below highlights the main offline macro editor functions in red.
These buttons will be explained in detail while working through the Macro functions.
Create Action pull down

menus, popup elector
Insert and Cancel
buttons.
Macro Action Sequence

area.
Button for “Ripple

Delay” dialog box
Delegate Button.
Used when Editing macros
Edit Value parameter

Edit Value menu link
Macro Action delays

13.5.10 Creating a Macro “Offline”

The following example will go through the steps of making an “Offline” macro for a simple
wipe transition.
Open the Macro Edit menu, then touch the “Create Action” drop down menu, the menu will go
dark and 6 options will appear; Bus & Xpt, Store, Peripheral, Effects, Options and
Miscellaneous. These will be the base for all offline macros.
Touch the {Create Action} button to start creating a new macro.
Select Bus & Xpt - Transition - Wipe, the menu will return to the Macro Edit main menu.

Touch the {Details} button an a dialog box will open with “Wipe Setup” options (the dialog box
options will depend on the type of macro action being inserted). Select the M/E for the
transition, then select if the transition will be a Key or Bgnd transition wipe, and then select the
type of wipe from the wipe table. Finally touch {Insert After} to insert the action. The action
can now be seen with the macro information in the “Macro Action” table below.
Remember to “Save” the macro when done.
Note: Actions can be inserted into an existing macro using the same method. Just by selecting
where the new action is going to be inserted then using the “Create” offline macro editor to
create a new action and insert it into the existing macro.

13.5.11 Edit an existing Macro using the Using Value and Delegate Parameters
There are two ways to edit a macro, the first is to change the value of a recorded action, this
means that the user can select an action in the recorded macro list and use the “Edit Value”
parameter to change the action of the macro.
For example, if a background crosspoint button was pressed as the macro action, the user
can use the “Edit Value” parameter to change the action to a different background
crosspoint.
Delegates
Button
Edit Value
Parameter
The second way is to use the Delegate menu and select a completely different action, i.e.
change from selecting a background crosspoint to selecting a Key within the selected action.
Macro Delegate
Menu
The “Value” parameter and the “Delegate” options can be used to change actions within any
previously save macros in any project. This is done by simply selecting the Project and Macro
and loading the macro within the “Macro Load” menu.

13.5.12 Bitmap
If a macro is going to be assigned to a macro button mnemonic display on the Kula control
surface, on a MAV-UFBPAD module or on a MAV-AUTO module, a bitmap can be generated
that can be associated with the recorded macro and displayed in the mnemonic display above
the macro button or on an OLED button.
In the macro main menu, touch the {Bitmap…} menu link button.
A bitmap can be derived from several places within the Macro Bitmap menu. The first areas
are the Preset Library and the User Library.
The Preset Library has a range of pre-installed icons. Touch the “Preset Library” attacher
and then use the “Preset Library” parameter to scroll through the icons.
As the user scrolls through the icons, when the required one is found, touch the {Grab from
Library} button under the icon. The selected icon will now be displayed in the grid.

Once the icon has been selected, the user needs to save the icon with the already saved
macro, so that it can be attached to the mnemonic display or OLED button.
Touch the {Assign...} menu link button and the selected icon is displayed just above the
menu link buttons (see below left). Touch the icon and the “Macro-Load” menu is displayed.
This is only for associating the icon with the macro.
Touch the {Save...} menu link button and the Macro - Save menu is displayed. Touch to
select the required macro in the table and touch the {Save} button, a dialog box will appear
asking the user if they wish to overwrite the saved macro, touch {Yes, Overwrite}.
The icon is now displayed in the mnemonic display or OLED button.

The User Library is basically the same as the Preset Library in the way that it is used, the only
difference is that the icon library will have been created by the user. The user can create their
own icon using the “Pen” function or “Text” function.
Scroll through the list of icons in the User Library using the parameter control and then touch
{Grab from Library}. The icon can be attached to a mnemonic display or OLED button in the
same way as described above.
The “Brush Size” parameter is used to adjust the line thickness when creating an icon for the
User Library. Touch the {Pen} button, then touch the grid area and the user can now start
creating their own icons.
Touch the {Clear Edit} button to clear the grid and start again.
As displayed in the menu above, the two hand drawn names have different thickness brush
sizes. By touching {Save to Library} will save the created icon to the User library.
To create an icon, select Pen from the Draw Mode parameter and the user can create their
own icons by drawing in the large grid area. To delete any mistakes in the grid, select Eraser
in the Draw Mode parameter and rub out the mistake in the grid.
When happy with the icon press the {Save to Library} button and the icon will be saved to
the User Library.

The “Text” function allows the user to type letters into the grid area using the on-screen
keyboard.
The “Font” parameter gives the user a selection of font choices when typing text using the
on-screen keyboard. Touch the {Text} button and a cursor is displayed in the grid. The cursor
can be moved to the required position in the grid by simply touching the cursor with a finger
then sliding it around the grid.
Touch the {Keyboard} button to display the on-screen keyboard and type text into the grid.
If the text is not in the correct position in the grid touch the {Move} button and use a finger to
slide the text around the grid to the correct position.
The “Store” attacher is used to select an internal Store or a Sub-Clip. This allows the user to
grab the image from the store and use it as an icon. In this attacher, the user can also select
an Icon from the icon library
Use the “Store”, “Sub-Clip” or “Icon” parameters to select an image and then touch the
{Grab from} button to place the image into the grid.
If the grabbed image is going to be used in a mnemonic display, set the “Full Color Bgnd” to
“No” because the mnemonics are mono color. Set to “Yes” if the image is going to be used for
an OLED button.

The “Colors” attachers change the color and brightness of the macro buttons on the control
surface.
The “Ready”, “Running” and “Pause” parameters allows the user to change the default color
of the buttons after they have been attached to a macro. The “Brightness” parameters are
also used to change the brightness of the different states of the macro buttons.
The “Foreground” Color and Brightness parameters are used to change the default state of
an OLED button.

13.5.13 Saving a Macro

Once the macro has been setup, configured and a bitmap has been chosen, the next step is
to “Save” the macro.
Press the {Save…} menu link button to enter the Macro - Save menu, then using the
parameter controls, select a Current Project and a Destination within the Macro Save table.
A Name and Description of the macro can also be added by touching the Red attacher button
twice, and entering the required name and description using the on-screen or USB keyboard.
Finally, press {Save} and the macro will be saved to the Hard Disk along with any associated
Bitmap, Store image or Icon image.
If the user then assigns the macro to a button, the bitmap image from the grid is also assigned
to the button.
Note: Up to 1000 macros can be saved in a single Project.

13.5.14 Assigning Macros to buttons

Press the {Assign…} menu link button. The Macro Assignment menu will then open. This
menu has a table that displays a list of macro’s that are saved within Projects.
To attach a macro to a button on the control surface, first select a Project using the Current
Project parameter and then select a macro within that Project.
Press the Button Assignment {Attach} button and the button will go Red. All the control
surface buttons will now go out ready for the user to select a button; buttons with macros
already assigned will go Green. If the selected macro is already assigned to a button it will be
lit Red.
Note: The same macro can be assigned to as many buttons as required.
Press the button on the control surface where the selected macro is going to be attached. The
panel will return to the normal configuration and the macro will be attached to the button.
To detach a macro from a button on the control surface, press the {Detach} button. Once
again the button will go Red. The control surface lights will go green for buttons with macros
attached and any button which has the currently selected macro in the table will be lit Red.
Press the button you want to detach the macro from. The control surface will now return to its
normal configuration. The {Detach} button in the menu will go Gray and the macro will no
longer be associated with that button.
Note: The macro is not deleted the from the Project, just removed from the button it was attached
to.
To find out which macros are attached to buttons, press the {Locate} button on the GUI. Any
button on the panel with a macro associated with it will either be lit Green or Red as described
above.
Pressing a button on the control surface which has a macro attached will highlight the macro
in the table. This will work in reverse as well. To find the particular macro, touch on it in the
macro table, then press the {Locate} button. Any button with that macro attached will light
Green.

13.5.15 GPI Assignment

This function allows an external device to control a saved macro. The GPI parameter control
selects the GPI pin that the external device is connected to. The selected GPI pin and
attached macro are displayed in a table in the GPI Assignment area.
To attach a macro to a GPI pin, select the macro in the macro file table, and then use the GPI
parameter to select the required GPI. Once the correct GPI pin has been selected, press the
{GPI Attach} button to attach the external device to the macro. The table next to the
Attach/Detach buttons displays the GPI pin and the attached macro.
To Detach a macro from a GPI, select the GPI/Macro in the table and then press the {GPI
Detach} button. This will detach the GPI pin from the external device.

13.5.16 Macro Load

The macro load menu will load a Macro into the active buffer ready to use. The macro can
then be attached to a button on the control surface.
There are two ways to view the saved macros:
• As a list of macros in a table
• As a list of Icons that have been attached to the macro.
Select a Project using the Project parameter control. Notice that if a Project has any macros
attached they are listed in the Load for Editing table.
Once a Project has been selected, a macro can then be selected using the Macro parameter
control. The Project and the macro are also listed in the Name/Description information bars
below the table.
{Load Macro} - will load the selected macro into a buffer ready to use once attached to a
button the control surface.
{Test Macro} - will run the macro function.
{Stop All Macros} - will stop all running macros.
{Resume All Macros} - when a macro is running this button light Orange. If a macro has had
a pause inserted, the macro will run until it reaches the pause and will stop. The Resume All
Macros button will flash along with the {Test Macro} button. Press the Resume All Macros
button to start the macro running once again.
If a macro has a bitmap associated with it, this will be displayed in the Gray bitmap display
next to the Test Macro button.
Cache Used is an indicator to show how much memory is used.

Apply Cache Change - will apply any change to the Cache Project number.
Note: If it is updated as the parameter is changed many files would load/unload as each Project
was passed!

13.6 Stores
Stores are one of the most important functions within a Kula system. They are used as
internal sources and are globally available throughout the system for Crosspoints, Keys, Util
buses and Auxes etc. Stores are comprised of Still images or Clips of video and Audio files
called ClipTraxTM. The Stills, Clips and Audio that can be either imported into the mainframe
via the Filing System menu, or “grabbed” into the internal memory from any source connected
to the up to 36 inputs to the Kula mainframe.
Stills and Clips and Audio are individual files that are saved into user-defined Projects. Up to
1000 stills and clip files can be saved into each Project.
Note: When loading video clips into Stores, Kula will automatically allocate the correct amount of
time (memory) to the Store to allow the clip to play once loaded, up to the maximum
amount of memory in the mainframe. The amount of video storage available will also be
affected by the type of video standard set by the user.
Before still images, video clips or audio can be imported into the Kula mainframe, the files
have to be processed through a software application called K-Manager; which converts the
original file format into the Kula native.sws format.
Note: K-Manager is a free software application that comes as an accessory with a new system,
or can be downloaded from the SAM website (see the contact details at the rear of this
manual).

13.7 ClipTraxTM - overview

A unique feature to Kula is that the Stores functionality is now capable of storing audio as well
as video, the Audio Store function is known as “ClipTrax “. The audio and video data in an
individual Store are kept in separate areas of memory and can be manipulated independently
of each other (described later in this section).
ClipTrax can be used in several scenarios:
• Pre-rendered flying key clips for MAVTrans transitions.
• Audio accompaniment on a general background,
Audio can be output to any of the up to 12 outputs as “Embedded Audio” this is setup in the
Eng Config - Output Setup, where the user turns the “HANC/VANC” function On for an
output to pass audio.
User Config - ME Outputs menu, where the user enables Ancillary on an M/E Output by
output basis. The user has a number of options for the Ancillary data. Please read the User
Config - ME Outputs section of this manual.
The audio information is output as AES 8 channel audio with video, which is output as SDI.
The ancillary audio can also be passed via the Store functionality, which is the ClipTrax
option, the embedded ClipTrax audio can then be passed to the mainframe outputs.

The audio or audio and video can be grabbed from an imported Clip, and then placed in one
of the available Stores. Here the audio and video can be manipulated separately to build a
clip or the audio can be combined with video in another Store to build a clip.
Audio can be imported using the Filing System Import/Export option, from a memory device,
and placing the imported audio into a Project.
If imported using a memory device, the file format must be a.WAV file with the following rules
applied: 48kHz, 24 bit, that can contain up to 8 channels of audio.
The files can be can loaded or saved maintaining the Audio or Video in a Clip.

13.8 Importing Stills and Clips

It is important to understand how to get Stills and Clips into the Kula mainframe before using
the Stores menus. As mentioned earlier, Stills and Clips can be imported into the mainframe
via the Filing Sys menu; through one of the USB ports on the mainframe.
To do this, connect the hard disk drive or memory device to the mainframe and then press the
{Filing System} button on the GUI.
Press the {Import/Export...} button and then in the Import button area, press the {Stills...}
button.
Use the Removable Device parameter to select the memory device containing the stills or
clips and press the {Select Device} button. The contents of the memory device will be
displayed in the gray area, left hand side of the menu. Use the Destination Project and
Destination File parameters to select where the files will be imported to.
Using the Selector parameter and {Open/Close} button, navigate to the files that are going
to be imported. Again use the Selector parameter and the {Select} button to select the
required files and then press {Import...}.
The files will now be imported to the selected Project destination ready to use.

Going back into the filing system main menu, the imported files can be found in the {Stills...}
menu as shown below.
In this menu a new name and description can be given to a selected file using the on-screen
keyboard.

13.9 Store Load Menu

The Store Load menu as the name suggests is where Stills and Clips are loaded into
Stores.
To get to the Stores menu, in the Home menu, press the {Stores} menu link button from the
list of Global functions.
The first menu that will appear is the Store - Load menu.
To get to all of the other Stores function menus, press the menu link button in the top bar area
of the menu and a list of Store menus will appear.
The Store Load menu displays the stills and clips along the top of the menu, that are
contained within the currently selected Project, File and Project information, displays the Key
and Fill information and details relating to the currently selected still or clip.

13.9.1 Using Store Load

When the user imports Stills and Clips files into a Kula mainframe, they are all imported into
Projects. To find the stills and clip files, use the Project parameter to scroll through the
Projects. Notice that when scrolling through the list of Projects, the stills, clips and audio file
“mini pics” change to reflect what is in each Project.
Note: Notice that there is a number in the bottom left corner of the minipic. This is the.sws
number given to the still or clip when converting it in the K-Manager software.
In the Store Load main menu, the Stills, Clips and Audio Clips are sequenced in numerical
order. This number appears on the bottom left of the mini pic starting with 0 and ending at 999
depending on the number given to the still or clip in the K-Manager software.
The minipic is generated from a still or the center frame of a Clip. The bottom right hand
corner will display “C” if the image is a Clip.
A “K” in the bottom right corner indicates that the Still or Clip has a Key saved with it. The Key
will be loaded into the Coupled Store. A “CK” identifies the clip as having a Key associated,
and would be used when keying over a background. A speaker in the top right corner signifies
that the Store contains audio content.

The two minipics in the middle of the menu depict the currently selected Still, Clip, Audio file
or Fill and Key portions of the file.
Notice in the diagram above that the Fill portion of the file is on the left and the Key portion is
on the right. Below the minipics displays the details of the currently selected still or clip file.

13.9.2 Loading a Still or Clip into a Store

Touch the Store that the Still or Clip file is going to load into. Then press the {Load} button to
load the image into the selected Store.
When loading a clip into a Store, the Load button will light up green and stay lit until the clip is
loaded. The process may take a few seconds depending on the size of the clip, especially if
the clip is in a 1080p video format and a few seconds long.
When selecting a clip, press {Load & Play} and the clip will load into the Store and play for
the duration of the clip.
If the original Fill Store is an audio only file, and the user wants to keep the audio content as
part of a new Still or Clip, by pressing the {Keep Audio} button the audio content will remain
as part of the new Fill Store. This could be used for example in a Clip Transition.
This option is the same when an audio file is loaded and the “Keep Video” function is used.
Note: This function will only work when the Load Mode parameter is set to Replace Sub-Clip
(as described below) the Keep Video and Keep Audio buttons will be grayed out if Load
Mode is on any other setting.
Load Mode Parameter
New - Allows the user to load new stills and clips into a Store.
Note: Any stills or clips in the selected Store will be over written.
Add To Sub-Clip - This will send a still or clip to the Sub-Clip folder of a selected Store, each
time a still or clip is selected by touching the miniclip or pressing {Load} the still or clip will be
sent to selected Store as a sub-clip. In the Append To Sub-Clip mode, if a different still or clip
is loaded into sub-clips, the original still/clip will be over written.
Replace Sub-Clip - This will replace a still/clip in the selected Store Sub-Clip.
Insert Before - If a number of stills/clips have been loaded into the Sub-Clip folder, using the
Store Sub-Clip parameter to move to a defined point within the sub-clip line-up, a still/clip can
be instead before the selected still/clip in the sub-clip line-up.
Insert At End - Allows the user to insert a still/clip at the end of the Sub-Clip lineup, to the
point at where the sub-clip folder is full.

13.10 Sub-Clips
Sub-Clips is a function that allows up to 31 stills and clips to be loaded into a single Store.
This allows quick and easy access to stills and clips without having to load each Store when it
is needed.
13.10.1 Creating Sub-Clips

As mentioned earlier, Sub-Clips are multiple stills and clips that have been loaded into a
single Store. Sub-Clips are created in the Store Load menu, using the Load Mode
parameter.
Use the Project parameter to select where the stills and clips that will fill the sub-clip Store will
come from.
Use the Delegate menu to select a Store that will contain the sub-clips, then use the menu
expander in the Load Mode parameter set to “Append To Sub-Clip” to start entering
stills/clips.
Touch a minipic from the selected Project and it will be added as the 1st sub-clip in the
selected Store. Look at the Store Sub-Clip parameter and it will have “1” highlighted. Set the
Load Mode parameter to “Insert At End” and then each minipic that is touched will load a
still/clip into the Store as a sub-clip.
Up to 31 stills/clips can be entered into sub-clips for each Store. In the Store Contents menu,
the Store that contains the sub-clips will have the number of stills/clips loaded at the bottom
right of the minipic (as shown above in the right hand side menu).
To see the Sub-Clips that were just loaded, enter the Store - Contents menu. The selected
Store that contains the sub-clips should have a yellow box around the Store. Use the top
rotary control to scroll through the loaded the sub-clips.
Next, enter the Contents menu, then using the “Selected Sub-Clip” parameter to scroll
through the list of sub-clips. Information regarding the video standard, length of clip etc. is
displayed in the left side of the menu.
The loaded sub-clips are displayed along the bottom of the menu. The user can use Sub-Clip
parameter to scroll through them or use their finger to slide the list horizontally left/right to get
to the desired sub-clip.
On the Kula control surface, if the crosspoint that the Store containing the sub-clips is
selected, then what ever sub-clip is selected will be displayed on a monitor.
Delete Sub-Clip - will delete the selected sub-clip still/clip out of the Store
Clear Store - will clear all sub-clips out of the selected Store.

Automatic Reload - when set to Yes this causes the still or clip to be automatically reloaded
from the hard disk whenever the original file location is updated. If the Store contains
something that was grabbed rather than loaded, then this has no affect.
Lock Store - will lock the Store down and not allow any sub-clips to be deleted from or any
changes made to the selected Store.

13.11 Store Play/Edit

This menu allows the user to play or edit a selected clip.
Touch the {Play/Edit} menu link button to open the Store Play/Edit main menu (as shown
below).
13.11.1 Transport Controls
1 1
3 3
4 4
1. Play/Rev - plays a clip forwards and in reverse at standard speed
2. Stop - stops a clip
3. Steps to Start or End - steps to the end or the start of the clip
4. Frame Step - steps a clip forward and backward by one frame
Loop - will make the file loop from start to finish indefinitely.
Ping- Pong - will make the file run from start to finish then finish back to the start again
constantly.
Clip Advance - will automatically go to the next clip in the Store when the previous clip is
finished playing.
Audio Mute - will mute any audio that a clip may contain when playing a clip

Parameter Controls
Active Sub-Clips - this displays the number of sub-clips within the selected Store.
Position - displays the current run time of the selected clip
Play Rate - this can be used increase or decrease the play rate of a clip. It has to be
“Enabled” for this function to work. The default is set to “1.00” which is normal speed.
Playback Mode - The user has the option to play back Clips in Field or Frame mode, or
Field 1 Only or Field 2 Only using the Playback Mode parameter control.
This feature can be used if a Clip is made from a sequence of individual Stills. If each Still is a
Frame in duration the user can Play/Position the Still and in the Stop state, both fields (Full
resolution) will be displayed. If the material is Field-based then in Frame mode the user will
risk seeing flickering images from two different fields.
Loop Count - this parameter selects how many times a clip is played back in a loop. When
set to “0” the clip will pay until stopped. The parameter can be adjusted from 1 to 100 loop
counts.
Audio Delay - if the audio needs to start later than the video, the Audio Delay parameter can
be adjusted.
When set to 0% (default) the audio and video will start at the same time, +100% the audio will
start after the video finishes. -100% the video starts after the audio has finished.
Trans Duration- this parameter displays the current Transition Duration time. The user is
able to use this information when setting up an audio/video clip to be used in a clip transition.

13.11.2 Using Edit Mode
Press the {Edit Mode} button, then using the Position parameter control, the user can setup
“in” and “out” points on the Audio/Video Clip.
Position the start point of the Clip as required and then press the {Mark In Point}. “In Point”
button. A numeric keypad is displayed that allows the user to enter a time. It is the method for
the {Mark Out Point}.
Press the {Apply Edit} button and the changes will be applied to the selected clip
Come out of Edit Mode by pressing the {Edit Mode} button. When the {Play} button is
pressed, the Clip will only Play, Loop or Ping-Pong, from the set In Point and set Out Point.
This new Clip can now be saved.
Follows Fill - If editing a clip that has an associated Key signal, Key Follows Fill is will also
mark the selected In and Out Points for the Key signal in the coupled Key Store.
Edit Audio - this allows the user to edit and audio clip in the same way as editing a video clip
as described above.

13.12 Store - Contents

The Store - Contents menu Shows a set of mini pics of stills and clips that are currently
loaded into Stores.
Touch the {Contents} menu link button to open the Contents main menu (as shown below).
Note: For Clips, the mini pic will show the center frame of the Clip.
The menu is only used to display the stills, clips, audio files and sub-clips which have been
loaded into each Store.
If a Store has sub-clips loaded, the top rotary control can be used to scroll through the
sub-clips.

13.13 Store - Contents

In the Store - Load menu, press the {Contents…} button, this menu will show further
information about a selected still or clip.
Sub-Clips - If a Store contains Sub-Clips, the bottom right of a minipic will display the number
of stills/clips contained within the Store and the Sub-Clips parameter will also display the
number of stills/clips contained within the Store.
Standard - displays the video standard of the selected clip
Video - displays the length of the selected clip
Frames - displays the length of a Clip
Width & Height - displays the number of horizontal and vertical pixels (aspect ratio)
Audio - displays the length of the selected audio file
Name - is the short name given to the selected still, clip or audio file. The name is user
definable and can be changed using a USB keyboard. Touch the keyboard symbol and a
cursor will flash in the Name box, enter a name and press the return key on the keyboard.
Delete Sub-Clip - will delete a selected sub-clip from the selected Store
Lock Store - this will set a lock on the selected Store in the Store Contents menu. The Store
will display a padlock symbol top right corner of the mini pic (shown above). If the user tries to
change the Store once it is locked, a dialog box will appear with options.
Automatic Reload - when set to Yes this causes the still or clip to be automatically reloaded
from the hard disk whenever the original file location is updated. If the Store contains
something that was grabbed rather than loaded, then this has no affect.
Clear Store - will clear all contents for the selected Store including all sub-clips

13.14 Store - Grab

Another option to generate a Still or Clip is the Store - Grab option; this allows the user to
grab images, video or audio clips from a Crosspoint, M/E Output, Matte or from another Store.
Touch the menu link button in the menu bar to display the list of Store Menus, then touch the
{Grab} button to open the Grab main menu (as shown below).
13.14.1 Taking a Grab

This example is taking a grab using the most simple method. Using the Grab Crosspoint
parameter (or pop-up selector), select the required still or video source that contains the
images or video content, then using the Grab To Store parameter, select the Store into which
the grabbed information will be placed and press the {Grab Video} button.
If the information that is grabbed is coupled with another Store for a Key, the Grab function will
grab the Key as defined in the crosspoint mapping into the coupled Store.
The minipic at the bottom of the menu will display what is currently grabbed, which will be a
still, or the center frame of a clip.
Grab Options
Single Frame - used to grab a single frame into the Store on press.
Latching Grab - this will latch the grab function and allow the grabbing of Clips. This option is
best used with the Stop When Full to end the grabbing once the Store is full i.e. once all the
available frames in the Store have been used.
Latching Grab is best used for grabbing Video or Audio files. Pressing the {Grab Video}
button, which turns the button green, then pressing latching grab for the required grab time
will grab video only. Pressing the {Grab Audio} button, which turns the button green, then
pressing latching grab for the required grab time will grab will Audio only. With both buttons
green, Video and Audio will be grabbed.
Note: This is part of the ClipTrax function. Grab Mode has to be set to “Replace Sub-Clip” for
this function to work.
Grab - This will continue to grab while the button is pressed. This will also respect the Stop
When Full.
Preview Grab - This will place a preview of the grabbed image or video into the minipic at the
bottom of the screen.

13.14.2 Playback Transport Controls
1 1
3 3
4 4
1. Play/Rev - plays a clip forwards and in reverse at standard speed
2. Stop - stops a clip
3. Steps to Start or End - steps to the end or the start of the clip
4. Frame Step - steps a clip forward and backward by one frame
Grab Mode Parameter
New - Allows the user to grab new stills and clips into a Store.
Note: Any stills or clips in the selected Store will be over written.
Append To Sub-Clip - This will send a grabbed still or clip to the Sub-Clip folder of a selected
Store, each time a still or clip is selected by touching the miniclip or pressing {Load} the still
or clip will be sent to selected Store as a sub-clip. In the Append To Sub-Clip mode, if a
different still or clip is loaded into sub-clips, the original still/clip will be over written.
Replace Sub-Clip - This will replace a still/clip grab in the selected Store Sub-Clip.
Insert Before - If a number of stills/clips have been grabbed into the Sub-Clip folder, using
the Store Sub-Clip parameter to move to a defined point within the sub-clip line-up, a still/clip
can be insetted before the selected still/clip in the sub-clip line-up.
Insert At End - Allows the user to insert a grabbed still/clip at the end of the Sub-Clip lineup,
to the point at where the sub-clip folder is full.

Grab Parameters
Grab Store - the Store the video/audio grab will be saved in.
Grab Crosspoint - displays the source the Video/Audio is taken from.
Video Duration - length of the video clip
Audio Duration - length of the audio clip
Free Space - the amount of memory left in the system

13.15 Store - Save

As the menu suggests this is where stills and clips are saved into Files and Projects.
Touch the {Save} menu button to open the Save main menu (as shown below).
This menu will show a mini pic of the Store that is about to be saved (as shown above right).
Use the Current Project parameter to select the Project. Select the file number using the
control File parameter to select where the still or clip will be saved.
Determine if the file is going to be saved with Save With Auto Play - On or Off.
A name can be given to the file. Once the selections have been made, press the Gray Save
button to save the file.
Using the Store Sub-Clip parameter, the user is able to select stills and clips within selected
Stores, as the Sub-Clip parameter is adjusted the individual stills and clips are displayed in
the minipic.

14. Initial Setup Menu’s
14.1 Log into the System and Set Up a User Account

Kula is a Project driven system where the user is able to create 98 individual Projects to Store
and save their work and the user-defined setup of the system. All Shows are made up from
Projects and Config files. On logging into the Kula system, the first menu to appear will be the
Connected to..... menu. This menu allows the user to create up to 1000 Shows.
Project associated
with current show
Show Files
green signifies
current selected
Show
Config Files being

used in Current Show
Switcher State
load and Overwrite
14.1.1 Loading a Show

To load and existing show, touch one of the show icons at the top of the menu and a dialog
box will appear displaying information about the Project. Touch the {Load} button to load the
Project.
Touch and icon

and a dialog box
will appear
14.1.2 Switcher State - Overwrite and Load

In this menu, the user is able to load a “Show” if any have been created. They are displayed
as icons across the top of the menu.
There is also a Switcher State area below the Show icons that allows the user to Overwrite
the current Show state up to 8 times as a one button press “Save Everything” function.
Switcher State - Overwrite allows the user to save the current “Switcher State” at different
points in time. This is very useful because the user may wish to keep the current Show in its
original saved state, but may want to add newly created GMEM’s, DMEMs or add Stores etc,
which are saved in the Switcher State table.
This is done by pressing the {Overwrite} button. The date and time that the Switcher State

was saved (overwritten) is displayed in the list. By touching the boxed area next to the time
and date, a name can be given to the Switcher State. Touch {Load} button to load the
Switcher State.
14.1.3 Rolling Switcher States

This allows the user to save Switcher States in to a “Rolling List” of saved states. The
“Rolling Switcher State” function is different to the Switcher State Overwrite mentioned
above, because when the user touches the “Load” button, the menu will change to display a
list of saved states. The user is able to scroll down the list to a saved state, then choose to
select or unselect Stores, GMEMs, Panel, User and Eng Configs before loading the switcher
state.

14.1.4 Configure Shows

Press the {Configure Shows...} button to enter the Configure Shows menu.
Press the {Create Show} button and a new show will be added to the top of the table. The
show can be moved down the show order by pressing the {Move Down} button.
Use the parameter controls to select the Projects, Configs and GMEM’s as required from the
attachers in the menu.
Note: If there are no Projects, Configs or GMEM’s already setup, they can be added to a show at
any point later when created. See the section “Projects” for more information about
creating Projects.
If an Icon is required for easy recognition of the show, use the parameter controls to scroll
through the icons and finally when happy with the show setup press the {Apply Changes}
button.
To Delete a show, use the Show Select parameter to select the show and then press the
{Delete} button.
To Load a show, again use the Show Select parameter to select the show and then press the
{Load Show} button.
A show has now been created and will be displayed along with other Shows at the top of the
Connected to menu. To load a show in this menu, touch the show icon and a dialog box will
appear asking the user if they want to load the show.

14.1.5 Status
In the Connected menu, press the {Status...} button to get to the Status menu.
This menu displays the current status of a Kula system. The information includes, the GUI
Panel and Mainframe software versions and IP address of the Panel and the Mainframe, the
mainframe and panel names, the panels connected to the system and the time/day/date and
also the mainframe serial number. It also displays information related to the software version.
Panel Software Version
Panel IP Address
Mainframe Software
Version
Mainframe IP Address
Panel Login Limit
UHD Mode indication
SME or FormatFusion3
Status
Press the {Info...} button and information relating to the specific software release is shown in
the Status - Upgrade Information menu.
Note: Press the [UP] button on the GUI to get back to the Connect menu.

14.1.6 Defaults
The Defaults menu is used to load pre-saved Projects, GMEM's and Configs, which dictate
the way the mainframe starts up after power-up and log-in. In this menu, the mainframe may
also be reset to a default configuration state.
1 4
On the left hand side of the screen under the Startup Defaults heading (1) there are three
attacher boxes. Touch an attacher to reveal the parameter controls associated with the
selected functions (2).
Touch the top attacher box to change the Default Project, Default Panel Project and Default
Panel Config. The next attacher down is the Default User Project/Config and Default I/O
Project and Config. Touch the bottom attacher to change the startup GMEM’s.
After making changes to the startup default parameters, press the {Load Defaults} button to
load the new startup settings, then press the {Save Changes} action button to save the new
Startup Defaults.
Note: The Startup GMEM loads when the mainframe is powered up

Normal GMEM is used when any GMEM is set to use normal values when saved.
Pressing one of the menu buttons in the Apply Factory Defaults box (3), will cause the
system to be reset to a factory reset configuration.
Pressing one of the Apply Factory Defaults buttons will not erase the startup files Stored in
mainframe hard drive, it will only step out of the default startup files that are currently loaded.
The pre-saved startup GMEM/Config files may be accessed at any time.
In the center of the screen is the Panel Auto-Connect box (4). From here the system can be
set to automatically connect to a preferred mainframe each time the system is switched on
and boots up. Press the {Preferred Mainframe} button. The next time the system is switched
on, at boot up, the system will go straight to the Connected to menu. The {Last Mainframe}
button sets the mainframe to start-up as the last mainframe that the system was being used
as. Press the {Disabled} button to disable these functions.

14.1.7 Log Off

Pressing the {Log Off From Mainframe} button, a prompt message will then appear asking
the user if they actually do wish to Log Off.
This is a safety mechanism designed to stop the user from accidentally logging off without
saving their settings.
After log off, the “Connect” menu will appear.
In this menu, the user can also access the “Engineering Config” menu.

15. Maintenance & System Management
15.1 Log Off - Mainframe Configuration

Pressing the {Log Off From Mainframe} button, a prompt message will then appear asking
the user if they actually do wish to Log Off.
This is a safety mechanism designed to stop the user from accidentally logging off without
saving their settings.
After log off, the “Connect” menu will appear.
In this menu, the user can also access the “Engineering Config” menu.
The Switcher Login column will show the mainframe the user can log into. Switcher Status
column will have the given name of the Switcher.
Mainframe Config
button displays
Switcher button Name given to the
displays the name mainframe.
of the switcher/s Mainframe serial
number

The Default Login button allows a panel to log in “Exclusively” and will prevent any other
panel(s) logging into that switcher. To log in exclusively, select the {Default Login} button, top
right on the GUI Login.
If a panel is already logged into a switcher you cannot then log into it exclusively.
The Refresh button allows the user to refresh the display if other mainframes have been
connected whilst the mainframe is being used. Press the {Refresh} button and the system
will search for any other mainframes.
The Mainframe Finder menu, The “Mainframe Finder” menu is used to find mainframes
when the IP addresses of the mainframes and the control surface do not match.

15.1.1 Connect - Panel Config

The {Panel Config…} button will enter the Panel Configuration menu, showing the current
software version, IP Address and the given Panel name as shown below.
The software for the panel is usually upgraded when the mainframe software is upgraded in
the Mainframe Configuration - Upgrade menu, but using the Panel Configuration -
Upgrade menu, the user is also able to upgrade just the Panel software allowing the panel to
be used with a mainframe that is running a different version of software that is on the same
network.
The “Panel Display Frame Rate” parameter allows the user to set the frame rate to 50Hz,
59.94Hz and 60Hz. After setting the frame rate, a re-boot of the system is required.
The {IP Mainframes} menu is used to connect to other mainframes on a network. If a

mainframe is on a different VLAN or on a totally different network, the user has to know the
“Outgoing Gateway” of the facility they are working in, the “IP address” of the mainframe
they wish to connect to and the “Return Path Gateway”. All these parameters have to be
entered before being able to connect to the mainframe.

Press the {Upgrade...} button to enter the Panel Upgrade From USB menu. This menu
works in exactly the same way as the Mainframe & Panel Upgrade menu, where the user
inserts a USB memory device into one of USB ports on the mainframe or control surface, then
presses the {Select Device} button. All the information on the memory device will be
displayed as a filing system top left of the menu. Multiple versions of software can be Stored
on the memory device, so the user needs to select the required version using the Selector
parameter control.
Next press the {Get Info} button and information related to the selected software from the file
will be displayed in the information area. When happy that the correct software has been
selected, press the {Start Upgrade} button.
The software will take a few minutes to upgrade the panel. When finished press the {Reboot
Panel Only} button. The panel software upgrade is now complete.

15.2 Mainframe Configuration

Touch the “Mainframe Config” button to enter the Mainframe - Configuration menu. This menu
displays the current version of software the mainframe is running, the current IP address, and
the user is also able to give the mainframe a unique name.
A new IP Address can be given to the mainframe by touching the New IP Address attacher
and entering the new address using the parameter controls, then finally pressing the {Apply
Changes} button.
In this menu, the user can select if they want to set the Kula mainframe to SD/HD or UHD
(UHD mode), select 4 or 8 channels of FormatFusion3TM, add a second Multiviewer or create
a 3rd M/E.
15.2.1 Export
This will Export Status Log Files – in the unlikely event that the system should fail in any
way, this function allows critical data relating to a possible problem to be downloaded onto a
USB memory device in the form of a (.txt) file. Touch the Export status log files attacher, then
place the memory device into one of the USB ports on the mainframe, select the memory
device using the Removable Device parameter.
If the memory device is partitioned, select the partition that the log files are to be Stored in and
finally press the {Export} button.
15.2.2 Panel Login Limit

This limits the number of Control Surfaces that can be connected and logged into the
mainframe. The maximum number of control surfaces allowed to login is 6, but only 1 of the 6
control surface can be used at a time, or else there will be conflicts.

15.2.3 Mainframe Color

The Mainframe Color parameter allows the user to set an identifying color for each Kula
listed in the “Switcher Login” in the “Connect” menu.
Touch the color swatch and the “Mainframe Color” parameter will appear on the right.
The user has 85 different colors to select from.
When a color is selected, touch the {Apply} button to apply the color to the switcher.
15.2.4 SATA Drive Config

The SATA Drive config is used format the internal hard disk drive.
Touch the {SATA Drive Config...} menu link button to enter the SATA Drive Configuration
menu.
Important: WARNING! Caution is needed. This menu is used to format the internal disk drive!
To format the internal disk drive, touch the {Select} button and a button will appear allowing
the user to format the system disk.

15.3 Upgrade
This menu allows the user to upgrade the Mainframe and the Panel at the same time.
To upgrade the software insert a USB memory device into one of the USB ports on the
mainframe or control surface, then press the {Select Device} button. All the information on
the memory device will be displayed as a filing system top left of the menu. Multiple versions
of software can be Stored on the memory device, so the user needs to select the required
version using the Selector parameter control. Touching the “+” next to the software folder will
expand out the folder and display the contents.
Next press the {Get Info} button and information related to the selected software will be
displayed in the information area. When happy that the correct software has been selected,
press the {Start Upgrade} button.
The software will take a few minutes to upgrade the system. When finished the user is
prompted to Reboot Panel & Mainframe.
The system software upgrade is now complete.

15.4 Filing System

The filing system is as it suggests a menu where all the Projects, Configs, DMEM/GMEM,
Stills, Macros etc. are Stored.
This menu also has an extensive Import/Export facility which also includes Media
Management options.
To enter the Filing System menu press [FILING SYS] button on the GUI. The menu below will
appear.
All the menus are straightforward, easy to use and are accessed, updated and deleted in a
similar way.

15.5 Projects
15.5.1 Using Projects

As stated earlier Kula is a Project based system where all DMEM’s, GMEM’s, Panel Configs,
Stills, Macros and other files are Stored into individual user-defined Projects. To get to the
Projects menu touch the {Filing System} button on the GUI and the first menu that will
appear will be the Projects menu.
As you can see from the diagram above, Projects are in number order in the table. It also
allows the user to see what number can be chosen for a new Project i.e. any number that is
not in the table.
The columns depict the user-defined name given to the Project and the number of DMEM’s,
GMEM’s, Panel Configs, Stills, Macros and other files saved within that Project.

15.5.2 How to create a new Project

To create a new Project, use the New Project parameter to select an unused Project number
and then press the {New Project...} button. Notice that a new Project has been added to the
table.
New Project button New Project Parameter
A name can be given to the new Project by touching the Red name attacher button twice, and
then entering the name using the on-screen keyboard.
The new Project can now be used.

15.5.3 Export a Project

The Export menu allows the user to export selected or all Projects to an external hard drive or
memory device. Press the {Import/Export...} button, then press the {Export} button.
Use the Selector parameter to scroll down to the required Project and press {Select}.
Selected Projects will have a small Green square next to the Project number.
Pressing the {Exclude} button will exclude the selected Project from being exported, the
Project number will have a small Red square next to the Project number.
Pressing the {Open/Close} button will expand the contents of the selected Project, allowing
individual files within a Project to be selected.
Press {Next} and a menu will open that allows the user to select a device to export the
Project or Project file to. Use the Destination Device parameter to select the memory device
and press {Select Device}. The menu will now display the contents of the device.
Select a folder where the Project information will be exported to, or press the {New Folder}
and a New Folder will be created on the memory device. Press the {Rename} button and the
on-screen keyboard will appear allowing the user to give the “New Folder” a name.
Finally, press {Start} and the selected Project information will be placed on the memory
device.

15.5.4 Delete a Project

To delete a Project, select a Project using the Current Project parameter control then press
{Delete}. A message will appear requesting confirmation of deletion.
15.5.5 Project Locking

Each Project can now be locked to prevent files from being written and deleted. This is
indicated by the Padlock symbol next to the Project.
15.5.6 Default Project

Pressing the {Default} button will change the default Project from being Project 0 to being a
user-defined default Project.

15.6 Filing System - Config Filing System

The Eng Config, User Config, I/O Config and Panel Config menus all have exactly the same
functionality, so for this example the Eng Config will be used.
Note: The Eng, User and Panel Configs are saved within their own menus. The Filing System
menu is used to Export, Delete, Load, set Enables and make Default.
15.6.1 Overview
All Config files can be saved into a default Project or into a user-defined Project. Config files
are saved within their own Config main menu, meaning that if a specific Eng Config setup is
created by a user before the file can be saved, the user has to go into the Eng Config menu.
Press the {Save As...} button. Select a Project from the Current Project parameter, this is
where the Eng Config setup is recalled from. Use the Destination parameter to create a new
Eng Config file position, give the file a name and description and finally press the {Save}
button.

Currently selected
Project
Currently selected
File
Config Options
15.6.2 Export
The Export menu allows the user to export selected or all Eng Configs within a selected
Project to an external hard drive or memory device. Press the {Export} button.
Selected Projects will have a small Green square next to the Project number. Press
{Open/Close} to expand, select the ENGSETUP folder and press {Open/Close} again to
expand the engineering setup folder which will now display the individual Eng Config files.
Scroll down to the required file and press {Select}.
Pressing the {Exclude} button will exclude the selected Project/file from being exported. The
Project number will have a small Red square next to the Project/file number.
individual Eng Config files within a Project to be selected.
Project or Eng Config file to.

Use the Destination Device parameter to select the memory device and press {Select
Device}. The menu will now display the contents of the device.
Select a folder where the eng config file/s will be exported to, or press the {New Folder} and
a New Folder will be created on the memory device. Press the {Rename} button and the
Finally, press {Start} and the selected information will be placed on the memory device.
15.6.3 Delete an Engineering Config File

To delete an Engineering Config, use the File parameter to select the Eng Config file, then
press {Delete}. A dialog box will appear asking if the user wishes to Continue or Cancel.
15.6.4 Engineering Config File Locking

Each engineering config file can be locked to prevent files from being over-written or deleted.
This is indicated by the Padlock symbol next to the file.
15.6.5 Default Engineering Config File

Pressing the {Default} button the user is able to change the default Eng Config to a
user-defined default Eng Config. When the system is re-booted or switched back on, the
selected Default Eng Config file will start along with all the other default Configuration files.
15.6.6 Load Engineering Config File

The {Load} button is used to load a selected Engineering Config File.

15.7 Filing System - GMEM, DMEM, Stills, Snapshots, Button Maps, Macros
and Icons
The following explanation is an example of how to use the GMEM, DMEM, Macros and Stills
menus. As stated previously, these menus basically all work in the same way, there is only a
slight variation in options for GMEM’s and Macros.
15.7.1 GMEM Export

The Export menu allows the user to export selected or all GMEM’s within a selected Project to
an external hard drive or memory device. Press the {Export} button.
Selected Projects will have a small Green square next to the Project number. Press
{Open/Close} to expand, select the Project folder and press {Open/Close} again to expand
the GMEM folder which will now display the individual files within the GMEM.
Scroll down to the required file and press {Select}.

Pressing the {Exclude} button will exclude the selected Project/file from being exported. The
Project number will have a small Red square next to the Project/file number.
individual GMEM files within a Project to be selected.
Project or GMEM file to.
Use the Destination Device parameter to select the memory device and press {Select
Device}. The menu will now display the contents of the device.
Select a folder where the GMEM file or files will be exported to, or press the {New Folder}
and a New Folder will be created on the memory device. Press the {Rename} button and the
Finally, press {Start} and the selected information will be placed on the memory device.
15.7.2 Delete GMEM

To delete a GMEM/s, use the File parameter to select the GMEM, then press {Delete}. A
dialog box will appear asking if the user wishes to Continue or Cancel.
15.7.3 Lock GMEM

Each GMEM can be locked to prevent them from being over-written or deleted. This is
indicated by the Pad Lock symbol next to the GMEM.
15.7.4 Normal
This will assign the selected GMEM as the GMEM that sets the “Normal” values for all
parameters in Kula.
15.7.5 Startup
This will set a user-defined GMEM to a startup state, for instance, if the Kula mainframe is
rebooted when a software update has taken place, the mainframe will startup in the
user-defined “Startup” GMEM state i.e. with resize parameters set to 0.00 they will start up at
0.00, or if the GMEM includes resize measurements that start up at 5.369 then it will start up
in that state
15.7.6 Load GMEM

The {Load} button is used to load a selected GMEM.

15.8 Import/Export
This menu is used to import/export Projects, Stills, GMEMs, Macros and Configurations from
a USB memory device.
Kula can import 98 Projects, and 1000 (0 - 999) Configs, Stills, Clips, Macros etc into each
Project.
The Import and Export menus all work in the same way where the user will select Project or
individual files to import or export. The menu displays a familiar folder structure which is easy
to navigate and use.

15.8.1 Importing
Importing Files/Projects into the Kula is a similar process to exporting as explained on the
previous pages. The import process is done via one menu. The example below describes
importing Stills.
Press the {Import/Export...} button and then in the Import button area, press the {Stills...}
button.
Use the Removable Device parameter to select the memory device containing the stills or
clips and press the {Select Device} button. The contents of the memory device will be
displayed in the gray area, left hand side of the menu. Use the Destination Project and
Destination File parameters to select where the files will be imported to.
Using the Selector parameter and {Open/Close} button, navigate to the files that are going
to be imported. Again use the Selector parameter and the {Select} button to select the
required files and then press {Import...}.
The files will now be imported to the selected Project destination ready to use.
Going back into the filing system main menu, the imported files can be found in the {Stills...}
menu as shown below.
In this menu a new name can be given to a selected file using the on-screen keyboard.

Use the Removable Device parameter to select the memory device, press the {Select
Device} button and the information on the memory device will be displayed in the menu.
Use the Selector parameter to scroll through the folders on the memory device until the
required folder is reached. Press the {Open/Close} button to expand the folder and use the
Selector parameter to scroll to the required file. Use the same method to select multiple files
in a folder.
Note: Projects, GMEMs, DMEMs, Stills and Clips or any type of file that is numbered can retain
their numbers by pressing the {Retain Numbers} button.
Use the Destination Project and Destination File parameters to select where the files will
be imported to, and then press {Import}.
The selected information will now be imported into the Kula mainframe. As with the Export
menu an Import Status menu will be displayed.

15.8.2 Import / Export Status

This will as the menu suggests, allow the user to check up on the status of any files being
imported or exported.
If a file is being imported/exported accidentally and it is not required, scroll to the file with the
Selector parameter and press the {Purge Done} button. The file will be deleted from the list.
The {Advance} button will advance the import/export process to the next selected file to be
imported/exported.

16. Contact Information
16.1 Kula Support

© 2017
16.1.1 Customer Support
For details of our Regional Customer Support Offices please visit the SAM web site and
navigate to Support/Customer Support Contacts.
https://s-a-m.com/support/247-support/
Customers with a support contract should call their personalized number, which can be found
in their contract, and be ready to provide their contract number and details.
16.2 Copyright and Disclaimer

Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrightable material and
information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without
limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen
such as icons, screen display looks etc.
Information in this manual and software are subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of SAM. The software described in this manual is
furnished under a license agreement and can not be reproduced or copied in any manner
without prior agreement with SAM, or their authorized agents.
Reproduction or disassembly of embedded computer programs or algorithms prohibited.
No part of this publication can be transmitted or reproduced in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any information storage and
retrieval system, without permission being granted, in writing, by the publishers or their
authorized agents.
SAM operates a policy of continuous improvement and development. SAM reserves

the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this
document without prior notice.
Covering V3.1 Software Releases

Kula User Instruction Manual Issue 3 Rev 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kula User Instruction Manual Issue 3 Rev 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kula User Instruction Manual Issue 3 Rev 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Covering V3.1 Software Releases

4. Kula Mainframe Rear Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

5. Kula Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

6. Control Surface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

8. How to Save Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 2 © 2017 SAM

8.2.1 Creating a DMEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 3 © 2017 SAM

9.11.1 Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

11. 12G-SDI Setup and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

12. Operator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 4 © 2017 SAM

12.3.6 Transition Control Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 5 © 2017 SAM

13. Effects Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

14. Initial Setup Menu’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 6 © 2017 SAM

15. Maintenance & System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

16. Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 7 © 2017 SAM

2. Warnings and Precautions

2.0.2 Safety Warnings

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 8 © 2017 SAM

2.0.3 Lithium Batteries

The Kula mainframe contains Lithium batteries to provide non-volatile memory.

2.0.4 Mainframe Mains Supply Voltage

Mains Inputs to the Kula Mainframe

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 9 © 2017 SAM

4 x RMW8 18 USA MAINS LEAD IEC TO 3BLADE PLUG 2.4M

GREEN lead connected to E (Protective Earth Conductor)

WHITE lead connected to N (Neutral Conductor)

BLACK lead connected to L (Live Conductor)

4 x RMW8 16 POWER CORD 10A 2M (IECSKT-IEC PLG

GREEN/YELLOW lead connected to E (Protective Earth Conductor)

BLUE lead connected to N (Neutral Conductor)

BROWN lead connected to L (Live Conductor)

2.1.2 External DC PSU for the Kula control Surface

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 10 © 2017 SAM

2.2 Safety and EMC Standards

This equipment complies with the following standards:

UL1419 (3rd Edition)

EN55103-1:2009 (Environment E4)

EN55103-2:2009 (Environment E2)

FCC / CFR 47:Part 15 (Class A)

EMC Performance of Cables and Connectors

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 11 © 2017 SAM

2.3 On Receipt of the Kula System

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 12 © 2017 SAM

Note: Diagrams are for illustration purposes only.

2M/E Kula (24 Crosspoint) 1x K1X and 1x KPX Control Surface

2M/E Kula 1x KPP and 1x K1P Control Surface

1M/E Kula K5P (1M/E 19”) Control Surface

Kula 12G-SDI Mainframe

Issue 3 Rev 1 Page 13 © 2017 SAM

• 4 Full Effects Keyers with Lin/Luma

• 2 assignable DVE Engines (will give 4 independent boxes)

• Chroma Key assignable to all Keys (not DSKs)

• Transition Keyer with dedicated ClipStores for Key & Fill

• Mask Generator per Keyer